JP7056706B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, when a gaming medium is launched into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings by a launching means and the gaming medium wins a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are used. There is a gaming machine in which a gaming medium is paid out to a player ( for example, Patent Document 1).
In this type of gaming machine, a plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game medium that has won a prize in the corresponding winning opening, and a process for electrically connecting the plurality of predetermined detection means to add the game value to the game. It is known that a game value-adding means to be executed and a process execution means electrically connected to the game value-giving means to execute a predetermined process are provided. The game value-giving means stores information for reference in advance, which is information used for processing for giving game value to a game and is referred to for detection of a predetermined detection means. This reference information differs depending on the model of the gaming machine.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046

On the other hand, the process execution means is also required to execute a predetermined process based on the reference information, while the process execution means does not store different reference information for each model in advance at the time of manufacturing from the viewpoint of facilitating manufacturing. There was a request to do so.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is information that is different for each model used for processing for adding game value to a game in the game value-giving means, and is for detection of a predetermined detection means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and can be used without being stored in advance in the processing execution means that executes a predetermined process . ..

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 detects a launching means, a flow-down area in which a game ball launched by the launching means flows down, and a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area of the flow-down area. A plurality of predetermined detection means, a game value giving means that is electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executes a process for imparting a game value to the game, and a payout that pays out the game ball as the game value. The game value is provided with a means and a process execution means for executing a predetermined process, which is electrically connected to the game value-imparting means and does not transmit or receive a control signal to the payout means. The giving means is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game, and includes a first reference information storage means for storing reference information referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means. The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the specific process for advancing the game is started. The first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and the predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is the information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, are processed. The processing execution means includes a second transmission means to be transmitted to the execution means, and the processing execution means stores reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means. A storage means, an execution means for executing the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means, and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means. The processing result information storage means for storing the processing result information which is the information about the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means, and the display control means for controlling the predetermined display means based on the processing result information are provided. The game value adding means and the processing executing means are configured by using integrated circuits integrated in different semiconductor chips, are housed in different board boxes, and are used for the second reference when the power is turned off. The information storage means may lose the stored reference information, and the game machine is provided with the game value-imparting means and has a main control means for performing main control of the game, and the main control means. The sub-control means for executing the process based on the instruction is provided, and the process execution means is provided in the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a launching means, a flow-down region in which a game ball launched by the launching means flows down, and a plurality of predetermined detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined region of the flow-down region. , A game value-giving means that is electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executes a process for imparting a game value to the game, a payout means that pays out a game ball as the game value, and the game value-giving. The game value-imparting means is provided with a process execution means that is electrically connected to the means and does not transmit or receive a control signal to and from the payout means, and the game value-imparting means is for the game. Information used in the process for imparting game value, the first reference information storage means for storing reference information referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means, and the power to the game machine. Reference information corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply is started and before the execution of the specific process for advancing the game is started. The first transmission means for transmitting the signal to the processing execution means and the predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information which is the information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means are transmitted to the processing execution means. The processing execution means includes a second transmission means, and the processing execution means includes a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means, and the second reference information storage means. An execution means that executes the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means, and the predetermined information by the execution means. A processing result information storage means for storing processing result information, which is information related to the processing result of the processing, and a display control means for controlling a predetermined display means based on the processing result information, the game value imparting means, and the game value-imparting means. The processing execution means is configured by using integrated circuits integrated in different semiconductor chips, is housed in different board boxes, and when the power is turned off, the second reference information storage means stores the information. The reference information that has been used can be lost, and the game machine is provided with the game value-imparting means and executes processing based on a main control means for performing main control of the game and a command from the main control means. Since the processing execution means is provided in the sub-control means, there is an effect that the reference information can be used without being stored in the processing execution means in advance.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a figure which showed the structure of various counters, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a diagram in which the number of reserved balls is 2. It is the figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for a big hit schematically in the case of, (d) is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) when the number of reserved balls is 2. (E) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) when the number of reserved balls is 2. It is a figure which showed the example of the prize ball number table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio management main process executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the setting information reception processing executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the setting information reception processing executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio calculation process executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the inspection result output processing which is executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (C) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information storage process executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the inspection result output processing which is executed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning combination process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the combination ratio main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the combination ratio processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the combination ratio main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a base display device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents in the base display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value stored in an outside work area of RAM in the MPU of the main controller, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing each base. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the value data schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the base value processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the base value calculation process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the base value display processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining part of the base value display processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a front view of the setting key showing the case where the setting key is in the off state, and (b) is a front view of the setting key showing the case where the setting key is in the on state. The figure which showed the start-up mode of a pachinko machine and the state of each of the RAM erase switch, the setting key and the door open switch at the time of power-on of a pachinko machine for starting up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode. Is. (A) is a diagram showing the role of the RAM erase switch and the setting key in the setting change mode, and (b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of the display contents of a base display device in a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the first symbol display device, and (b) is a case of notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 in the round number notification LED. Lighting pattern, lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, lighting pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed, and lighting for notifying that the setting is being confirmed. It is a figure which showed the pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the data stored in the work area outside the RAM in the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the base display processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the data stored in the work area in the RAM in the MPU of the main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the start-up mode set corresponding to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). There is.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super reach effect, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, a ball launched into the front region of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (the second starting opening 64b described later. FIG. 2) is executed when the ball is entered (starting prize), and after the symbol (third symbol described later) is displayed variable for a predetermined time, the combination of the symbols displayed as a stop is used for the starting winning. It is a production that presents the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) to the player.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-mentioned variable effect and the reach effect executed during the variable effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation invisible to the player. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of "city stage"-> "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the normal reach effect is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the effect mode of super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. If the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, the effect mode of the super reach is determined based on the effect mode candidate selected when developing into the super reach, and the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect mode.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player moves forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rear, right and left) may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted. Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect mode of super reach may be selected based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The firing interval of the balls in the ball launching unit 112a is set to be about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, and a first ordinary winning opening 63a. The second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface side of the inner frame 12. Attached to. The first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate a variation display performed in association with entering a ball (starting prize) into any of the start ports of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b (starting prize), or indicate a variation display depending on the lighting state of the LED 37a. As a stop symbol after the end, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is shown by the lighting state, or the ball entered in the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b is changed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is determined to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. , If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, the "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). ..

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change, probability change state), in other words, a special gaming state (big hit). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change, probabilistic change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second starting port 64b. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to enter.

Instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, the time when the electric accessory described later attached to the second starting port 64b is opened or once according to the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is released may be changed by hitting. Specifically, in the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is longer than in the case other than the time saving state, or the number of times the electric accessory is opened per time. May be increased more than in cases other than the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, at least two of increasing the hit probability of the second symbol, prolonging the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory can be performed at the same time. good.

The first ordinary winning opening 63a is arranged on the lower left side of the game area, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. When the ball enters the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c. Eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, eight balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls when a ball wins in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the number of winning balls when a ball wins in the second ordinary winning opening 63b do not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the former is 6 The number of prize balls may be different, such as 8 balls and the latter being 8 balls.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. The third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using a ball entering (starting prize) into any of the starting ports of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b as a trigger. , It is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the through gate 67. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, left and middle. And the three symbol columns on the right are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. This is performed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", and the main symbol with an odd number (1,3,5,7,9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned on the effective line L1. ) Is performed, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. When the state shifts to the high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned on the effective line L1. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the “low probability symbol”) are aligned on the effective line L1.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (variable effect). The main display area Dm and the other upper 1/3 are sub-display areas Ds for displaying advance notice effects, characters, and the like. Further, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided in the central portion on the lower bottom side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, the symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and the display area is displayed. The symbol string Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The reserved ball number display area Db is the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation display (variation effect) has not been executed among the balls entered in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Is the area to display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the small area Ds1 on the left and the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined motion, and sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or is usually a black boy. The color of the hair and the color of the normally white headband will change, and another character will appear to give a notice.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the variation effect (variation display) is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). The number of ball entries is suspended up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. ..

That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are configured to be suspended up to a total of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times in total. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved ball number display area Db, the reserved ball number is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. be. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory provided in the second starting port 64b is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the second symbol hold lamp 84.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, instead of lighting the second symbol holding lamp 84, the variation display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the case of the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the through gate 67 passes is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). May be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A first starting port 64a is disposed below the variable display device unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is disposed below the first starting port 64a. The first starting port 64a is provided with an opening through which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open so that the ball can enter the ball. When the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the first starting port switch 208a. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Will be executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to bring the second starting port 64b into an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). In the normal state, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand upright), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or enters the ball. It is in a difficult state.

Then, when the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol of "◯", the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is operating. It is in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol of "○" and hits, and when the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. Then, it is possible to make a lot of big hit lottery.

When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the second starting port switch 208b. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Will be executed. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning openings in which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening (also referred to as a large opening opening or a specific winning opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the large winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The large winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the big winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state where the ball can easily win the big winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

When a ball enters the large winning opening 65a, the large winning opening switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the large winning opening switch 208e is turned on is counted. , The number of balls that have won the big prize opening 65a is counted, and the closing condition of the big winning opening 65a is determined. In addition, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the turning on of the large winning opening switch 208e. Then, by repeating the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 65a due to the big hit, many balls are in a state where it is easy to win the big winning opening 65a, and the player has a game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual. This state is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A specific winning opening and a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A gaming state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening is open.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, the through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the second symbol (not shown) is turned on by the main control device 110 due to the on. A winning lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball passing through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the variation display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 is performed. After the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, move from a state in which the blades of the electric accessory stand up substantially vertically to a substantially V-shape (inverted C-shape), and the ball is moved for a predetermined time. Is in a state where the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or a state in which the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. Further, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through the switch for detecting the entry of the balls provided for each winning opening. To. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through the out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball, and then is discharged to the island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. ..

Here, the ball launched into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. Therefore, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out opening 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls fired in the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. Further, the out switch 208f actually passes through the game area and detects a ball that has entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. That is, a ball that was fired into the game area but was caught somewhere in the game area and was not used for the game as a result is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent the balls not used for the game from being counted as the balls fired in the game area as a result.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

Further, the main board is provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting performance such as a game machine's accessory ratio can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is usually covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a so that the inspection terminal 207a is exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the gaming performance such as the role ratio of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In the main control device 110, the main pachinko machines 10 include a jackpot lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processing.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 15) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large winning opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group including various switches for detecting a ball that has entered each winning opening and a ball that has been guided to a ball discharge path through each winning opening and an out opening. Various switches 208 including the above and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 has a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasing signal output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

The main control device 110 is provided with a bonus ratio management chip that manages information regarding the bonus ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The accessory ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information necessary for managing the accessory ratio from the MPU 201, processes and stores the received information, and thereby the accessory of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information about ratios.

An inspection terminal 207a is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance such as the ratio of the game machines, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the inspection device 300 is connected. Information on the accessory ratio managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 and other information on inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can determine whether or not the bonus ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is within the normal range based on the information regarding the bonus ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

Here, a detailed configuration of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main controller 110.

As described above, the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is connected to the input / output port 205 as the input side, and the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, and the second symbol hold lamp 84 as the output side. In addition to being connected to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, as various switches 208 connected as input sides, the first start port switch 208a and the second start port switch 208a for detecting a ball that has won a prize in the first start port 64a. The second starting port switch 208b for detecting the ball winning in the starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c for detecting the ball winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b are won. The second normal winning opening switch 208d for detecting the winning ball, the large winning opening switch 208e for detecting the winning ball in the large winning opening 65a, and the winning ball in each winning opening 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. And the out switch 208f that detects a ball that has entered the out port 66 and is guided to the ball discharge path, and detects that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is locked and released. The door opening switch 208g is connected.

The input / output port 205 is the start 1 port 205a to which the output of the first start port switch 208a is input, the start 2 port 205b to which the output of the second start port switch 208b is input, and the first normal winning port switch 208c. The normal 1 port 205c to which the output is input, the normal 2 port 205d to which the output of the second normal winning port switch 208d is input, the large winning port port 205e to which the output of the large winning port switch 208e is input, and the out switch. An out port 205f to which the output of 208f is connected and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected are provided.

The MPU 201 executes a switch reading process (see FIG. 11) for confirming the status of various switches in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the start 1 port 205a, the start 2 port 205b, the normal 1 port 205c, the normal 2 port 205d, the large winning port 205e, and the outport 205f, and the winning opening has won a prize. The number of winning balls in each winning opening and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls) by determining the presence or absence of the ball and the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharge path. The number of balls fired into the game area) is counted. Then, the number of each counted ball and the game state at that time (whether the jackpot is in progress, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, an error state, etc.) are determined. It is set to the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The bonus ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the bonus ratio based on the number of each ball. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and checking the output of the door opening switch 208g.

The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables 202a to 203d stored in the ROM 202. Further, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the bonus ratio in the bonus ratio management chip 207, and are the bonus ratio when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on. It is transmitted to the management chip 207.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are mainly used for jackpot lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in the MPU 201 of the control device 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, the various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first random number counter used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first random number counter C1 are used. ..

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first starting port 64a and a holding ball storage area 203b. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second start port 64b.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899) and then 0. It is configured to return to. Further, when the first per random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, and the first hit is performed from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

The value of the random number counter C1 per first is updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the ball wins a prize in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process). At the timing of the start winning), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is the first hit random number counter storage area of any of the hold areas 1 to 4 provided in the hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in 203b1. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for a low-probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state (a period during which the probability is not changing), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot than in the low-probability state. It can be divided into two types, one for high-probability states and the other for high-probability states used in the case of high-probability states (during probability change). Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that are big hits in the high probability state is 30, and the values are "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322". , 354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,833,866,892 "is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. ..

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set to the jackpot random number values so as not to be duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a big hit. Since the value of the random number can be difficult to predict, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the ball is started by either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. At the timing when a prize is won in the mouth (starting prize), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is the random number counter C1 per first among the first to fourth hold areas provided in the hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first type counter storage area 203b2 of the same hold area as the hold area to be stored.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect. Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8B. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value “40 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ”is associated with it, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table according to the set probability.

The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the starting port where the ball enters. That is, as the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b triggered by the entry into the first starting port 64a is a random number that becomes a jackpot. For example, "15R probability variation jackpot" is 40%, "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, and "2R probability variation jackpot" is 20%, and the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the ball enters the second starting port 64b. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number that becomes a jackpot, for example, "15R probability variation jackpot" is 55%, "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, and "2R probability variation jackpot". May be 5%.

In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first starting port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second starting port 64b are prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the first hit type corresponding to each jackpot type is prepared. The number of values of the counter C2 may be changed. Then, in the reserved 1st to 4th areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the values of the various counters stored in each area are used to win a prize in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. A flag indicating whether or not it is stored together is also stored, and based on the flag, the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area. You may choose a table. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the reserved first to fourth areas, and the values of various counters stored in the corresponding areas are set by the flags of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The jackpot type used to indicate which start port is stored with the winning and to determine the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag. You may choose a table.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops (reach other than front and back), "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and "completely off" where reach does not occur. Direction) The pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the ball is moved to either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the random number counter C1 for the first of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same hold area as the hold area.

The ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a stop pattern table 202c with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. And it becomes easy to select "completely off". In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front-back off reach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "front-back off reach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front-back off reach" or "front-back off reach". Become.

Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. The narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that it is possible to secure the ball entry time to the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the variation by the third symbol display device 81. The display will be easier to continue. Also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 17). Further, at the timing when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved 1st to 4th areas, the random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 of the same holding area as the holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the variation effect is performed based on various counters stored in one hold area, the MPU 201 is stored in the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the hold area and the ROM 202. The fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern table 202d. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect execution and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (c) to 8 (e). In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a jackpot and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d2, 202d3 used at the time of a miss are prepared. Further, as the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, the deviation (probability change) is used depending on whether the gaming state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a low-probability state at normal time excluding the time-saving state. A variation pattern table 202d3 and a variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

Further, each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1. A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referenced when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are provided separately.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls as in the present embodiment, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 is changed so that the table referred to simply on the condition of the number of reserved balls is changed. May be prepared. For example, each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 may be prepared separately as a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. .. Further, in each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is prepared with a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. The table 202d2 may be prepared with a different table for each number of reserved balls, and the variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation) may be prepared with one table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the jackpot variation pattern tables 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the jackpot types are divided into the 15R jackpot common, which is referred to when the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot are determined, and the 2R probability variation jackpot, which is referenced when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined. There is. Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), the fluctuation pattern is according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. The group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Will be done.

In common with the 15R jackpot, three fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and each fluctuation pattern is prepared. Is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation A is a variation pattern in which a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The variation B is a variation pattern in which a so-called super reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The super reach includes, for example, a reach that develops from a normal reach, as well as a long reach that has a long reach. The variation C is a variation pattern in which a so-called special reach in which the third symbol is aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach that develops from the normal reach and is different from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for fluctuation A in the table common to the 15R jackpot. It is 11 to 99 for B and 100 to 198 for fluctuation C. Since the table common to 15R jackpots is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, it is easy to select the variable C on which the special reach is executed in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It has become. However, by configuring the variation A in which the normal reach is executed and the variation B in which the super reach is executed to be selected, it is possible to provide a playability in which a big hit can be expected from any reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, a large number of pachinko machines with different production contents are prepared for each reach. For example, in the super reach, a rear image (a third symbol which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is prepared. There is a reach that changes the image displayed on the back side of the image quickly and displays it, a reach that suddenly displays a certain character, etc. It includes multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with the addition of. In the main control device 110, only the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are determined as the fluctuation patterns when the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is obtained, and in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, each variation A to Determine the detailed variation pattern corresponding to C. According to the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

For the 2R probability variation jackpot only, only the variation pattern of "2R variation" with a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared so as to be selectable. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, as shown in FIG. 7 (c). 2R fluctuations are associated with 0 to 198). That is, when the jackpot variation type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R fluctuation is selected by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation. Therefore, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main control device 110, the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation, for example, while displaying characters such as "chicken" or "girl" in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, finally. A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol due to lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, or the like is included.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a big hit or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established, the last. The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is displaced from the front and back, etc.) may be determined by another variation type counter.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, only the variation pattern of "2R variation" is selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached. A group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot may not be provided, and only the association between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot may be specified in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In this case, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R fluctuation" is selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, but one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved. You may do so. In this case, even in a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, such as a group common to the 15R jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the variable type counter CS1 is assigned to a certain hold area. The variation pattern associated with the value of the stored variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the holding area.

FIG. 8D schematically shows an example of the deviation pattern table 202d2 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the deviation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is not a value that becomes a big hit (big hit random number value), that is, a value that is out of the range, the game state is normal except for the time saving state. When in the low probability state, the variable type counter CS1 stored in the holding area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1. The variation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

Two fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation D with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation E with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, are prepared for complete deviation only, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated. When variation D or variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation effect in which high-speed variation of the third symbol is started and then stopped and displayed without establishing reach. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the deviation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation dedicated to complete deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is as follows. It is 0 to 98 and the fluctuation E is 99 to 198.

Further, in common with the reach, the above-mentioned three fluctuations A to C, that is, the fluctuation A in which the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81 with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the super reach with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds are the first. Three variation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable: variation B executed by the three symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds. In the deviation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation common to the reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A and 99 to 190 for variation B. , The fluctuation C is 191 to 198.

FIG. 8E schematically shows an example of the deviation pattern table 202d3 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the deviation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 8 (e), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, similarly to the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Fluctuation D and variation E can be selected as the variation pattern, and it is referred to when the reach other than the anteroposterior reach and the anteroposterior reach is determined, and the variation A to C can be selected as the variation pattern. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern that can be selected for each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the range, and the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, Depending on the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern. Determined from table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the association between each variation exclusively for complete deviation when the number of reserved balls is 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the variation D. It is 0 to 190, and the fluctuation E is 191 to 198. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. That is, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, and a large number of complete deviations (variation E) with a long fluctuation time are executed. If this is done, it takes time to start the next variable display, which may make the player wait and feel uncomfortable. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable.

Therefore, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the complete deviation has a shorter fluctuation time than in the other gaming states (normal state excluding the time saving state) (complete deviation). The deviation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured so that the variation D) can be easily selected. As a result, the possibility of causing discomfort to the player can be reduced by starting the next variable display at an early stage. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls (for example). In the case of 3 or more if the maximum number is 4, the variation display may be terminated at an early stage, so that the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) may be referred to for selection.

Further, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the variation type is the front-back off reach or the reach other than the front-back deviation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state, it is for out-of-bounds ( The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include the group common to the reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely out of order. In addition, a variable pattern table to be referred to when the stop type is a reach other than the front-back off reach or a reach other than the front-back off reach may be prepared separately regardless of the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the front-rear reach or the reach other than the front-rear reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

Further, in the variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for deviations shown in FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e), the variation D and the variation E are simply referred to as “complete deviation variation”, and the “complete deviation variation” is selected. In this case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through either the left or right through gate 67. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 10). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of (variation effect) and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The prize ball number table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins (wins) for each prize opening 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. Here, the details of the prize ball number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prize ball number table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the prize ball number table 202e, as the "starting opening type", the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening 65a Is stipulated, and for each winning opening, the "number of prize balls" corresponding to the winning opening is stipulated. Specifically, in the prize ball number table 202e, the prize ball number 3 is associated with the first starting port 64a, the prize ball number 2 is associated with the second starting port 64b, and the first ordinary prize is won. The number of prize balls 8 is associated with the mouth 63a, the number of prize balls 8 is associated with the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the number of prize balls 12 is associated with the large winning opening 65a.

The prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening for all the winning openings provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a prize opening other than the above-mentioned winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, the prize ball number table 202e including the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings is included. Is stipulated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball number table 202e, the "starting opening type" is defined as the "ordinary winning opening" by combining the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and is associated with the "ordinary winning opening". The number of prize balls may be specified as 8. If the number of prize balls in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as "3", the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are combined in the prize ball number table 202e. The "starting port type" may be defined as the "starting port", and the number of prize balls 3 may be specified in association with the "starting port".

The prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the bonus ratio management chip 207 in the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main control device 110, and is transmitted to the bonus ratio management chip 207 in the bonus ball ratio management chip 207. Used when calculating the ratio.

The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio in the bonus ratio management chip 207. Although the details will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

The accessory ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (triggers) as timings (triggers) for calculating the accessory ratio. The first is the number of fired balls, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 calculates the bonus ratio each time the number of fired balls reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when the predetermined time is reached. The third is the game time, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 calculates the bonus ratio when the game time by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time.

In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any one of "number of shots", "time", and "game time" is defined as the calculation timing (trigger) of the bonus ratio in the bonus ratio management chip 207.

When the information indicating the "number of shots" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the bonus ratio is provided every time the number of shot balls reaches 500 balls. The accessory ratio is calculated on the management chip 207.

When the information indicating the "time" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "time" and information indicating 12 o'clock, 17 o'clock, 19 o'clock, and 22 o'clock as "predetermined time", the time is 12 o'clock. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the bonus ratio is calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207.

When the information indicating the "game time" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the bonus ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating 2 hours as "predetermined time", the bonus ratio management chip 207 is used every 2 hours of game time. The bonus ratio is calculated in.

The trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the bonus ratio management chip 207 together with the prize ball number table 202e in the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main control device 110, and the bonus ratio is transmitted. It is used when determining a trigger for calculating the accessory ratio in the management chip 207.

In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter), the power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. By this input, the power cutoff occurrence information is set by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) executed. Then, in the main process of the MPU 201 (FIG. 17), when it is determined that there is power cutoff occurrence information, the stack pointer at that time and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203.

On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 20) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 19) at the time of turning on the power.

The RAM 203 further includes a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball storage area 203b, a hold ball execution area 203c, a start 1 counter 203d, a start 2 counter 203e, a normal 1 counter 203f, a normal 2 counter 203g, a large winning opening counter 203h, and an out. It has at least a counter 203i.

The reserved ball count counter 203a is a start port of either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variation display (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is counted up to four times based on the entry into the ball (starting prize). It is a counter to do. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (S616 in FIG. 16) after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of hold times of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. Further, by transmitting a hold ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of hold balls of the variable effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 is deviated due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 each time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, not only the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the hold ball number command but also the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1. , The first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in connection with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. The values of C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are also included.

That is, when there is a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the main control device 110 is , It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is changed based on the respective values. It pre-reads before the effect is executed, and determines what the variable effect will look like (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) before the variable effect is executed. Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, it is possible to decide the execution of various effects.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) when a start winning prize is detected. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the MPU 201 detects each counter from the counter buffer. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The hold ball storage area 203b has four hold areas (holds 1st to 1st) so that data corresponding to one start winning prize (counters C1 to C3 and CS1 values) can be stored (held) up to 4 times. It has 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c is data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) to be referred to in processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing the value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is used in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Shift to. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described with reference to FIG. 7 again. In the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used for setting a jackpot lottery and variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Used by.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first used for determining the jackpot type are used. The hit type symbol counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b is each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. Remember each value.

The holding ball storage area 203b is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas), the first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 for storing the value are stored. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although it is provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b (starting winning) is stored up to four times. However, in that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas). That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the old start prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize in time is stored in the reserved first area.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Similar to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the reserved ball execution area 203c stores the values of the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2. The first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is used as the hold ball. Each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c is shifted. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 17), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, and are notified to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. .. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area is transferred to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , The random value of the variable type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203c4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in an area (first to third) that is one smaller than the area number. In the present embodiment, the data is shifted only in the holding area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, when the data in the hold 1st area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203c and the hold 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to each area. Shift to the area with the smaller number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the hold areas (third to fourth) where the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It can reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the hold area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The start 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the first start port 64a, and the start 2 counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the second start port 64b. Is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the normal 2 counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening counter 203h is large. The out counter 203i, which is a counter for counting the number of balls won in the winning opening 65a, is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). be. All of these counters 203d to 203i are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (S616 in FIG. 16) after the power is turned on.

Further, the MPU 201 has a start 1 port 205a, a start 2 port 205b, and a normal 1 in the switch read process (see FIG. 11) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds. With reference to port 205c, general 2 port 205d, large winning port 205e and outport 205f, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning port switch 208c, the second ordinary winning port switch 208d , It is determined whether or not a ball is detected in each of the large winning opening switch 208f and the out switch 208g. Then, if there is a prize in any of the winning openings (a ball is detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning opening with the winning opening is counted up by 1, and the ball is in the out switch 208g. Is detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

The counting of the number of spheres in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the values of the out counter 203i are set as out information in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the information indicating the game state at that time. Will be done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i on the accessory ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the winning openings are again awarded in the next 0.5 seconds. The number of balls played is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of balls won in each winning opening is counted by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and the balls guided to the ball discharge path are counted. The number (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the bonus ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these counted values are accumulated for each value until it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, so that the function is used only after the power is turned on. The number of balls that have won in each winning slot until the timing to calculate the prize ratio, or from the previous calculation of the bonus ratio to the timing to calculate the next bonus ratio, is the winning slot. It counts each time, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game).

In this way, the number of winning balls to the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the bonus ratio management chip 207. Therefore, the bonus ratio management chip 207 is used in the actual game. You can accurately grasp the number of balls recognized as winning.

Further, tentatively, in MPU201, the number of balls won in each winning opening is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted. If these counts are performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without performing the counting, even the accessory ratio management chip will be guided to each winning opening or to the ball discharge path at short intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds). The ball must be monitored, which may increase the processing load and power consumption.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, these counting results are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds by the count of the MPU 201, so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 has every 0.5 seconds. In addition, each prize is awarded between the time when the power is turned on and the timing when the bonus ratio is calculated for the first time, or between the time when the previous bonus ratio is calculated and the timing when the next bonus ratio is calculated. The process of counting the number of balls won in the mouth for each winning mouth and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, the winning of each winning opening and the ball guided to the ball discharge path are monitored, but in the first place, these monitoring are the main games such as big hit lottery and prize ball judgment. It is necessary for such control, and the processing is originally performed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the firing interval of the ball launched into the game area by the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, so that each winning opening counted at 0.5 second intervals is used. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) are almost always 0 balls or 1 ball, and at most several balls. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). Even if the process of counting (the number of) is executed, there is no great influence.

The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 266. These are connected to each other via bus 206. The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

Further, a large-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. While the power is being supplied to the main control device 110, the capacitor 267 is charged, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 The electric power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to execute the process associated with the power failure. Instead of the capacitor 267, a rechargeable and dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

The CPU 261 is an arithmetic unit that controls the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and by executing a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the CPU 261 serves as a pachinko machine 10. The object ratio management chip 207 is used to manage the object ratio. By managing the bonus ratio in the bonus ratio management chip 207 with the CPU 261 and changing the software, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the functions and specifications of the bonus ratio management chip 207.

The RTC266 outputs the current time. The RTC266 has a built-in rechargeable and dischargeable secondary battery (not shown), and the RTC266 outputs the time while always ticking the current time, using the secondary battery as a power source. The time output by the RTC266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set by the trigger setting area 265b is "time", and the time indicated by the RTC266 is the trigger setting area. When the time coincides with or exceeds the "predetermined time" set in 265b, the process of calculating the bonus ratio is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, for the first reading memory 263, the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error in-progress information, or the jackpot information, the door-opening information, the error-in-progress information, or When the overtime information is added, the time at that time is read from RTC266, and the read time is added to each data together with each information.

The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various information set by the MPU 201, and is configured by a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data. The buffer 262 is provided with at least a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, a normal 1 buffer 262c, a normal 2 buffer 262d, a big winning opening buffer 262f, a big hit medium buffer 262g, an open buffer 262h, an error buffer 262i, and the like. ing.

The value of the start 1 counter 203d set by the MPU 201 is stored in the start 1 buffer 262a at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 is stored in the start 2 buffer 262b at intervals of 0.5 seconds. In the normal 1 buffer 262c, the value of the normal 1 counter 203f set by the MPU 201 is stored at intervals of 0.5 seconds. In the normal 2 buffer 262d, the value of the normal 2 counter 203 g set by the MPU 201 is stored at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the large winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 is stored in the large winning opening buffer 262e at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 is stored in the out buffer 262f at intervals of 0.5 seconds.

The jackpot middle buffer 262g stores information (big hit information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is during the jackpot. The opening buffer 262h stores information (door opening information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. The error-in-error buffer 262i stores information (error-in-error information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is in error at intervals of 0.5 seconds.

In the accessory ratio management chip 207, various buffers provided in the buffer 262 are set (written) by the MPU 201, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 performs setting information reception processing (FIG. 19) described later. See). The setting information reception process counts the number of winning balls for each winning opening based on various information set in the buffer 262, and the balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls launched into the game area). The number of these balls is counted and the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

The setting register 265 is a register for setting a setting value necessary for the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 is provided with at least a prize ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

In the prize ball number data setting area 265a, the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. In the trigger setting area 265b, the trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. When the power is turned on to the main control device 110, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b.

The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 275a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the winning combination ratio. Here, the number of prize balls for each winning slot is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. Every time the power is supplied, the information regarding the number of prize balls is transmitted to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the prize ball ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball number data setting area of the prize ball ratio management chip 207. By setting it to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the manufacture of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, when the models of the pachinko machines are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and the bonus ratio can be accurately calculated even if the same bonus ratio management chip 207 is used between the pachinko machines of different models.

The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261 and it is determined whether or not it is the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f. When it is determined, the process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio is determined by the bonus ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity that can record information about the bonus ratio in the bonus ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but the jackpot probability and the probability variation rate in the pachinko machine 10 are taken into consideration. Like this pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the bonus ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. By transmitting the trigger information data 202f to the ROM 202 to the bonus ratio management chip 207, the bonus ratio management chip 207 has a bonus at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio of the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264.

Only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 are the prize ball number data. It is configured to be set in the setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b. The startup process is a so-called boot process, which is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from setting the false prize ball number table and the trigger information data for the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio is reached. The first reading memory 263 is composed of a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, SRAM. The first reading memory 263 may be configured by a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

In the first reading memory 263, the start 1 counter 263a, the start 2 counter 263b, the normal 1 counter 263d, the normal 2 counter 263e, the big winning opening counter 263e, the out counter 263f, the jackpot medium data 263g, the open data 263h, and the error is in progress. At least the data 263i and the overtime data 263j are stored. All of these counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on the initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the power is turned on to the main controller 110 (. See S710 in FIG. 18).

Further, these counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referred to by the accessory ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and necessary processing is executed. After that, the CPU 261 again initializes all the data to 0 (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, in the first reading memory 263, the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while accumulating until the next timing for calculating the accessory ratio. ..

The start 1 counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 64a before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the start 1 counter 203d indicating the number of balls winning in the first start port 64a is set in the start 1 buffer 262a by the MPU 201, the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a by the CPU 261 is set. (That is, the number of balls winning in the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 1 counter 263a.

The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 64b before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls winning in the first start port 64a is set in the start 2 buffer 262b by the MPU 201, the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b by the CPU 261 is set. (That is, the number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b.

The normal 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a before the timing for calculating the bonus ratio. When the value of the normal 1 counter 203f indicating the number of balls won in the first normal winning opening 63a is set in the normal 1 buffer 262c by the MPU 201, the normal 1 buffer 262c is set by the CPU 261. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is usually added to the counter 263c.

The normal 2 counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b before the timing for calculating the bonus ratio. When the value of the normal 2 counter 203 g indicating the number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b was set in the normal 2 buffer 262d by the MPU 201, the normal 2 buffer 262d was set by the CPU 261. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263d.

The large winning opening counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening 65a before the timing for calculating the winning combination ratio. When the value of the large winning opening counter 203h indicating the number of balls that have won the large winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds is set in the large winning opening buffer 262e by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the large winning opening buffer 262e. (That is, the number of balls that have won the big winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning opening counter 263e.

The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls launched into the game area) by the time when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. When the value of the out counter 203i indicating the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds is set in the out buffer 262f by the MPU 201, the value set in the out buffer 262f by the CPU 261 (that is, 0). . The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is the "number of shots", this out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (number of shots) indicated by the out counter 263f is the trigger setting area. When the number of balls exceeds the "predetermined number of balls" set in 265b, the CPU 261 executes a process of calculating the accessory ratio.

The jackpot medium data 263g includes the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has become a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a jackpot by the time it is time to calculate the bonus ratio. The data is also specified. When the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the game state is set in the jackpot medium buffer 262g by the MPU 201, the jackpot information is combined with the current time indicated by the RTC266 by the CPU 261 and is a jackpot. It is added to the medium data 263g.

In the opening data 263h, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) by the time when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, the pachinko machine 10 opens the door. It is the data that defines the information that the door is open, which indicates that the state has been reached, together with the time at that time. When the opening buffer 262h is set with the door opening information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the CPU 261 sets the door opening information. Is added to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by RTC266.

The error data 263g provides error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in error by the time it is time to calculate the accessory ratio. It is the data specified together with the time of. When the MPU201 sets the error-in-error buffer 262i with the error-in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error as a game state, the CPU 261 sets the error-in-error information together with the current time indicated by the RTC266. , Is added to the error data 263i.

The overtime data 263j is stored in the pachinko machine 10 when the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is performed in the midnight time zone (for example, between midnight and early morning), which is normally outside business hours. It is the data that defines the overtime information indicating that some operation was performed at midnight together with the time at that time. When the MPU201 sets (writes) to the buffer 262, the time at that time is read from the RTC266 by the CPU 261 and the overtime information is determined to be in the midnight time zone. It is added to the overtime data 263j together with the current time indicated by RTC266.

The second read memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 may retain the stored data even when the power is turned off, and other than the flash memory, a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM: Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) or a magnetic resistance RAM (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), Resistive Random Memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random)
It may be composed of Access Memory) or the like. Further, while the second reading memory 264 is configured by the DRAM, the backup voltage is continuously supplied from the power supply device 115 to the DRAM even when the power is turned off, so that the data is retained even when the power is turned off. You may try to do it.

In the second reading memory 264, at least the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of launched balls 264c, and the game information data 264d are stored.

The bonus ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the bonus ratio calculated for each timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous bonus ratio data 264b is data in which data representing the continuous bonus ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

Here, the prize ratio is paid out in accordance with the winning of the second starting port 64b and the large winning opening 65a in which the prize is operated, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls), and is set to 70% or less. In addition, the continuous bonus ratio is the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player, which are paid out in association with the winning of the large winning opening 65a in which the bonus is continuously operated (prize). It shows the ratio of the number of spheres) and is set to 60% or less.

Originally, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio refer to the above ratios when the test firing test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but here, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the prize ratio indicated by The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the winning of the second starting port 64b and the large winning opening 65a is calculated from the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It is recorded in the prize ratio data 264a together with the time of the hour. Also, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the timing is reached for the first time, or between the previous timing and the current timing, a big prize is won. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the winning of the mouth 65a is calculated and recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is turned off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used, and the power is paid out while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio. The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated based on the number of balls (prize balls), and are recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a or the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the time at that time, respectively. .. As a result, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated and recorded, and even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are not leaked. The ratio can be calculated.

The number of balls winning in the first starting port 64a indicated by the starting 1 counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b indicated by the starting 2 counter 263b, and the like. The number of balls that have won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the large number indicated by the large winning opening counter 263e. The number of winning balls associated with each winning opening shown in the winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of winning balls in the winning opening 65a. By multiplying, the number of balls paid out in association with the winning of the winning opening can be calculated for each winning opening. Then, by totaling these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

As a result, the number of balls paid out with the winning of the second starting port 64b and the balls paid out with the winning of the large winning opening 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player. By calculating the total ratio with the number of, the bonus ratio can be calculated. Further, the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out in association with the winning of the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

The number of shot balls data 264c is the total number of balls fired into the game area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263, at each timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio, and the time at that timing. It is the data recorded together. The total number of balls fired into the game area between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the timing is reached for the first time, or between the previous timing and the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263f. When it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the launch ball number data 264c together with the time at that time indicated by RTC266.

The game state data 264d includes jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263, which are stored jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information. Is the data recorded together with the time associated with each information. When it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the jackpot information 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the overtime data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263, the door opening information, The error-in-time information and overtime information and the time associated with each information are recorded in the game state data 264d by the CPU 261.

At this time, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot medium data 263 g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the jackpot is continuously generated as a gaming state, so that the jackpot at the oldest time Only the information and the time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, in the case of the door opening information, the error information, and the overtime information, when each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and the time are respectively. Only is recorded in the game state data 264d. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be kept small.

When recording the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error in-time information, and the overtime information in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each information from the old time information to the game state data 264d. Record. Then, when the information recorded in the game state data 264d is output to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order of recording. As a result, each information is output in order from the oldest time, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the change in the gaming state with the passage of time by analyzing the information in the order of output.

However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to store each information in the game state data 264d side by side from the old time information. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read the information from the game state data 264d in order from the oldest time information and transmit it to the inspection device 300, or the CPU 261 may send the information to the inspection device 300. , Each information may be output to the inspection device 300 in the order of recording, and each information received by the inspection device 300 may be rearranged from the oldest time information.

The jackpot data 263g, the open data 263h, the error data 263i, and the overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263 correspond to the jackpot information stored, the door open information, the error information, and the overtime information, respectively. All of them may be recorded in the game state data 264d together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d is large, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operating state of the pachinko machine 10 while observing small changes in the game state.

Here, the information regarding the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the total number of balls fired into the game area, which can be recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c, is a predetermined number (respectively). For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of jackpot information, door opening information, error information, and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of launched balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is there. Is recorded. For example, the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, the number of launched balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are configured like ring buffers, and the positions where information is written on the ring buffer are managed. The oldest information is obtained by separately preparing a memory in the second reading memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264 and shifting the writing position by one each time the information is written. It is possible to realize the process of erasing and recording the latest information there. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the maximum number of information to be recorded in each data is reached, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can analyze the latest information including the state of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done. By preparing a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer in the second reading memory 264, even if the power is cut off in the middle, after the power is supplied, this is performed. From the continuation of the information stored up to, new information can be added and recorded.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs in the CPU 261 and the CPU 261 fires the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b recorded in the second reading memory 264. The ball number data 264c and the game state data 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each data 264a to d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 recorded each information recorded in each data 264a to d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). It is read out in order and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Simply connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a causes an interrupt, and a process of transmitting each information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed. Therefore, the transmission is quickly executed. Can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can analyze the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and quickly and easily detect fraudulent acts from these accessory ratios and continuous accessory ratios.

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number) specified for each, the CPU 261 first informs the data. The information recorded from the position where the information was written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read out and inspected. It is transmitted to the device 300. On the other hand, when the data for transmitting information to the inspection device 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number above) specified for each, it is indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written. The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written is shifted by one from the position next to the position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded). , The position where the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

Since the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, even if the power is turned off in the middle, the second reading memory 264 records information about the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10. Continue to be done. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze information on the accessory ratio and the like, including the information before the power is turned off.

Here, some fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b to guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big hit by increasing the prizes. In addition, there are some who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the large prize opening 65a by some method or guiding the ball to the large winning opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio will increase.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 obtains winning information from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to each winning opening. , The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated at predetermined timings and continuously recorded. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio recorded in the bonus ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. Thereby, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the fraudulent activity can be found when the fraudulent activity has been performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on the information on the number of balls fired into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU201, ROM202, and the like. As a result, it is difficult for the fraudster to modify the winning information or the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, it is also difficult to falsify or delete the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio recorded by the bonus ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated and output by the bonus ratio management chip 207.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, and the first reading memory 263 counts the number of winning balls for each winning opening, and the first reading memory 263. The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated based on the number of winning balls for each winning slot counted in the above, and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory. Generally, the non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time for writing, and is durable. There is a limit to the number of writes. In this embodiment, the first reading memory 263 composed of the volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 composed of the non-volatile memory are separated. First, the first reading memory 263 is used to win a prize. By performing the process of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each mouth at high speed, it is possible to count the winning balls in each winning mouth without missing them. Then, later, a process of calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio from the number of winning balls for each winning slot stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording them in the second reading memory 264 is performed at a predetermined timing ( By executing each trigger), the number of times of writing to the second reading memory 264 can be reduced, so that the above-mentioned problems caused by the configuration of the non-volatile memory can be suppressed from becoming apparent.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 15) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variation effect, and continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the effect mode of the super reach, the frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81.

The RAM 223 indicates that a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, or that a variable effect should be started in an on state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and displays various screens such as a variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol and a big hit effect at the time of a big hit, with a voice lamp. It is controlled according to a command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 110).

The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and a bus line 239, 240. have. The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected to the image controller 236 via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 and various other commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231.

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for effect such as a symbol (background symbol or third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 has an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed format in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a plurality of decompressed areas. It is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated by using at least a part of character information until the display is performed.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to obtain a third. It is to be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation processing (see FIG. 13) and the variation start processing (FIG. 14), which is one process of the variation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when firing the ball in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the large winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for opening / closing is executed (S103). That is, the big winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the big winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the large winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol is changed by the second symbol display device 83. The display is carried out. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. The details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. When it reaches (899,99,99,198,250, respectively in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first random number counter C1 or the first random number counter CINI2. It is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C2, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first start port 64a is executed. And the start winning process associated with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 64b of the second starting port 64b (S110). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

In addition, the other process (S112) includes a process of determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, a ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, a ball launched into the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or longer even though the information of the ball launch signal is set in the processing of S111. If not, it is judged that the ball is in an error state because it may be jammed. Further, when the payout abnormality signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the payout of the ball is in the error state. Further, when it is determined that a large vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the game is in an error state as there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. ..

To determine whether or not a large vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a vibration sensing sensor, and the output of the vibration sensing sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. It is performed by reading the output of the vibration sensing sensor in the process of S112. Further, in order to determine whether or not the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensing sensor for detecting a change in magnetism is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the output of the magnetic sensing sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. It is performed by reading the output of the magnetic sensing sensor in the process of S112.

If it is determined in the process of S112 that the error state is present, an error command including information on the error type is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the voice output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be turned on and blinked, and the third symbol display device 81 can display an image according to the error type. ..

Next, the switch read process (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing this switch reading process (S106).

In the switch reading process, first, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the large winning port switch 208f, and the out switch 208g are switched. The output is read by referring to the start 1 port 205a, the start 2 port 205b, the normal 1 port 205c, the normal 2 port 205d, the big winning port 205e, and the out port 205f of the input / output port 205, and the first start port 64a, Detection information (detection information ( Winning detection information) is saved (S151). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharge path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a to 208f.

Next, based on the prize detection information, it is said that a prize was won by the processing of S151 among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening 65a. If there is a determined winning opening, the number of winning balls corresponds to the number of winning balls so that the number corresponding to the winning opening (that is, the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) is paid out. The prize ball command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Then, based on the winning detection information, among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening 65a, it is said that a prize was won by the processing of S151. If there is a determined winning opening, 1 of the starting 1 counter 203d, starting 2 counter 203e, normal 1 counter 203f, normal 2 counter 203g, and large winning opening counter 203h, the counter corresponding to the winning opening that has won a prize is 1. At the same time as counting up, if it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, the out counter 203i is counted up by 1 (S153).

Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the winning information (values of each counter 203d to i and information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) was set in the previous accessory ratio management chip 207 (). S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), the processes of S155 to S157 are executed. First, in the processing of S155, the values of the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the normal 1 counter 203f, the normal 2 counter 203g, and the large winning opening counter 203h are used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information at that time. It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (S155).

As a result, the value of the start 1 counter 203d is set in the start 1 buffer 262a of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the value of the start 2 counter 203e is set in the start 2 buffer 262b of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the normal 1 counter is set. The value of 203f is set in the normal 1 buffer 262c of the bonus ratio management chip 207, the value of the normal 2 counter 203g is set in the normal 1 buffer 262d of the bonus ratio management chip 207, and the value of the large winning opening counter 203h is useful. It is set in the large winning opening buffer 262e of the object ratio management chip 207, and the value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

In this way, the counting of the number of spheres in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are used as winning information, and the values of the out counters 203i are used. Is set as the out information in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the information indicating the game state at that time. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of balls won in each winning opening is counted by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these counted values are accumulated for each value until it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, so that the function is used only after the power is turned on. The number of balls that have won in each winning slot until the timing to calculate the prize ratio, or from the previous calculation of the bonus ratio to the timing to calculate the next bonus ratio, is the winning slot. It counts each time, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game).

Temporarily, the MPU201 does not count the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Assuming that these counts are performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207, even with the accessory ratio management chip, winning a prize at each winning opening or a ball guided to the ball discharge path at short intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds). Must be monitored, which may increase the processing load and power consumption.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, these counting results are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds by the count of the MPU 201, so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 has every 0.5 seconds. In addition, each prize is awarded between the time when the power is turned on and the timing when the bonus ratio is calculated for the first time, or between the time when the previous bonus ratio is calculated and the timing when the next bonus ratio is calculated. The process of counting the number of balls won in the mouth for each winning mouth and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, at intervals of 2 milliseconds when the timer interrupt process is executed, the winnings to each winning opening and the balls guided to the ball discharge path are monitored, but in the first place, these monitorings are a big hit lottery or It is necessary for performing the main control of the game such as the prize ball determination, and is originally processed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the firing interval of the ball launched into the game area by the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, so that each winning opening counted at 0.5 second intervals is used. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) are almost always 0 balls or 1 ball, and at most several balls. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). Even if the process of counting (the number of) is executed, there is no great influence.

The gaming state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, during a big hit, during opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and during an error. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

Further, whether or not the gaming state is in error is based on the result determined by the processing of S112 of the timer interrupt processing. In the process of S155, when it is determined in the process of S112 that an error state is in effect, information indicating that an error is in progress as a game state is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

When the game state set by the process of S155 includes the jackpot, the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot middle buffer 262 g, and when the game state includes the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the game is opened. If the information during door opening is stored in the middle buffer 262h and the gaming state includes error, the error in error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information regarding the gaming state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the information regarding the accessory ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and finds a mysterious tendency in the accessory ratio, the inspection device 300 searches for the cause by referring to the information indicating the gaming state. Can be done.

After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S156). The accessory ratio management chip 207 executes a setting information receiving process (see FIG. 19) described later based on this interruption signal, and is a winning ball for each winning opening based on various information set in the buffer 262. The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls launched into the game area) is counted, the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine is used. Information on the gaming state of 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

After the processing of S156, the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the normal 1 counter 203f, the normal 2 counter 203g, the large winning opening counter 203h, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are set to 0. Is initialized (S157), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the processing of S157, the number of balls won in each winning opening in the next 0.5 seconds is again counted by the counters 203d to 203h for each winning opening. Further, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

In the process of S154, when this process is executed for the first time after the power is supplied to the main control device 110, the winning information (values of each counter 203d to i and the pachinko machine) is sent to the previous accessory ratio management chip 207. After setting (information on the gaming state of 10), it is considered that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the number of balls won in each winning opening detected before the power is turned off and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The value of each of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203, which has not been set, can be set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied, provided that the values of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203 are held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress the omission of recording of the winning information and the out information due to the power failure.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12, a start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has entered the starting port (starting winning) of either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, and if there is a starting winning, the counters C1 to C3, respectively. The process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes this start winning process, it first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (S201). Here, the first start port switch 208a for detecting the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting for detecting the winning of the second starting port 64b by the process of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11). The result of winning or not winning the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which is determined based on the output signal of the port switch 208b, is used.

When it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (there was a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N) of the variable effect is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is no prize in either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. If the number of reserved balls is not N <(S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (holding). The number of balls N) is added by 1 (S203). Then, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved 1st to 4th areas, the 1st hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the 1st hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a. It is held (stored) in 203b3 and the variable type counter storage area 203b4, respectively (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved first area. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", it is in the reserved third area. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area of the above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved fourth area.

Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (held ball number N) after the addition by the processing of S203, and the first random number counter C1 stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first hit. In order to transmit the hold ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

By receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the hold ball number N in the hold ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4). do. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command to pre-read before the variation effect based on the respective values is executed, and which of the variation effects is. It is judged before the execution of the fluctuation effect whether it will be something like (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the fluctuation time, etc.). Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, it is possible to decide the execution of various effects.

As the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the processing of S205, the value itself read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204 may be used, or the reserved ball storage area may be used in the processing of S204. The value stored (held) in 203b may be read out and used.

When the processing of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110). Is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold). The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S307) starts the execution of one of the reserved variable effects, so that the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203b toward the hold ball execution area 203c, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball execution area 203c from the hold first area to the hold ball execution. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift processing. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value (number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress is determined (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than 0. Determine the interval as being demoed.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can be shown the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2. Depending on the value of, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a probability variation state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variable jackpot to be transferred) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, a blue LED is turned on when a 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after a big hit, a red LED is turned on when a 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a red LED and blue are turned on when a 15R normal jackpot is reached. LED and turn on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and confirm the stop symbol. conduct.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a variation start process (S307), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S307). This fluctuation start processing (S307) performs a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and also performs the first symbol display device 37. And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the jackpot that determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. When the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420" , 448,486,506,543,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”is defined as the jackpot random number value.

In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and they match. In some cases, it is determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8 (b)). (See) and, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds. Is it a 15R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds? It is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. 3 The display mode at the time of a big hit in the symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed in the display mode at the time of a big hit is determined. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot, first, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8C) to be used is selected according to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. When 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "15R jackpot common" group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

When 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group of "2R probability variation jackpot only" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, only 2R variation is selected in this case. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation) and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the third is based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front-rear and front-rear reach, non-front-rear and non-reach, and complete disengagement is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is set according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the off-design symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state in the normal time excluding the time saving state, the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time. 202d2 (see FIG. 8D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability change) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a (probability change) (See FIG. 8 (e)) is selected.

Then, when complete deviation is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, it is held in the "complete deviation only" group of the selected deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 or deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

Further, when the front / rear out reach and the reach other than the front / rear outbound are set as the stop types in the processing of S402, the "common reach" of the selected outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. In the group of, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S501) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process shifts to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S614 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S614 even in such a case.

As will be described later in the process of S706 in FIG. 17, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S614). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S615, S616) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S615, S616) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S60: No). S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, the initialization signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S610). As a result, the accessory ratio management chip 207 executes an initial setting process such as initializing the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to 0 by receiving the initialization signal (S711 in FIG. 18). The accessory ratio management chip 207 is initialized so that the accessory ratio can be managed.

Next, the information of the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the prize ball number management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize is awarded when each winning opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e is awarded. Based on the number of balls, the prize ratio and the continuous prize ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Here, the number of prize balls for each winning slot is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. Every time the power is supplied, the information regarding the number of prize balls is transmitted to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the prize ball ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball number data setting area of the prize ball ratio management chip 207. By setting it to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the manufacture of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, when the models of the pachinko machines are different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used between the pachinko machines of different models, the accessory ratio can be calculated accurately.

Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S612). As a result, when the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is reached, the pachinko machine 10 The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated.

Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio is determined by the bonus ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity that can record information about the bonus ratio in the bonus ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but the jackpot probability and the probability variation rate in the pachinko machine 10 are taken into consideration. Like this pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the bonus ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. By transmitting the trigger information data 202f to the ROM 202 to the bonus ratio management chip 207, the bonus ratio management chip 207 has a bonus at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio of the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264.

After the processing of S612, the interrupt is permitted (S613). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly executed.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S702 and S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the process shifts to the process of S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired first random number counter C1 depending on whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. Will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S702 and S703, which are one of the main processes, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. .. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can be given randomness.

In the process of S701, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And the power cutoff information is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S706), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process, ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S601). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S701. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the present embodiment, the case where the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process in the main process has been described. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading that were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated in the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. The processing of the CPU 261 is roughly divided into a bonus ratio management main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and setting information reception that is executed based on an interrupt signal that is set from the MPU 201 and then receives from the MPU 201. There is a process and an inspection result output process executed based on the fact that the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, the bonus ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 in the bonus ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio management main process. This bonus ratio management main process is activated when power is supplied to the bonus ratio management chip 207.

When the accessory ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continuously performed. Then, when it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S711 and the initial setting is performed (S711). As a result, the bonus ratio management chip 207 executes the initial setting of the bonus ratio management chip 207 after waiting for at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 to be completed and the game control by the MPU 201 to be started. Will be done.

In the initial setting of S711, in starting the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the initialization required for each device in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, it is possible to suppress that meaningless data remains in the buffer, and the meaningless data is the first reading. It can be prevented from being stored in the memory 263. Further, in the first reading memory 263, the number of winning balls to each winning opening and the ball discharge path are guided from the time when the power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. The number of balls (that is, the number of balls fired into the game area) can be accumulated and counted, and information on the game state during that period can be stored.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the prize ball number table 202e is received from the MPU 201 (S712). Then, while it is not received (S712: No), the process of S712 is continuously executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the prize ball number management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize is awarded when each winning opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e is awarded. Based on the number of balls, the prize ratio and the continuous prize ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the trigger information data 202f is received from the MPU 201 (S714). Then, while it is not received (S714: No), the process of S714 is continuously executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. As a result, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b in the bonus ratio management chip 207 comes, the bonus ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and the bonus ratio The continuous bonus ratio is calculated.

As described above, only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 are the prize balls. It is configured to be set in the numerical data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from setting the false prize ball number table and the trigger information data for the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, when the interrupt signal transmitted after the winning information or the like is set from the MPU 201 is received thereafter, the setting information reception process is executed, and the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. The inspection result output process is executed by the interrupt signal.

When the interrupt signal is input at the same time, the setting information reception process is executed with priority over the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and game status information input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the bonus ratio management chip 207, and then information such as the bonus ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, it is possible to have the inspection device 300 perform the analysis including the latest information. On the other hand, when the interrupt signal is input at the same time, the inspection result output processing may be executed with priority over the inspection device output processing. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information regarding the accessory ratio and the like can be transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717), and S717 is continuously executed unless the power cutoff information is received (S717: No). In the meantime, when the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed in preference to the process of S717, and the interrupt is generated based on the fact that the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. When an interrupt signal is received, the inspection result output process is executed.

When the power supply cutoff information is received as a result of the processing of S717 (S717: Yes), the power supply to the main control device 110 (accessory ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. The details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

Next, the setting information reception process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this setting information reception process. This setting information reception process is executed based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after the winning information and the like are set from the MPU 201.

The setting information reception process includes winning information (values of start 1 counter 203d, start 2 counter 203e, normal 1 counter 203f, normal 2 counter 203g, and large winning opening counter 203h) set in each buffer 262a to 262e by MPU201. This is a process of storing the out information (value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i in the first reading memory 263. Further, in the case of the calculation timing of the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated based on the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and the data regarding the number of fired balls and the gaming state are calculated. At the same time, the process of recording in the second reading memory 264 is also performed.

First, refer to FIG. In the setting information receiving process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720). If there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h together with the current time indicated by RTC266 (additionally stored). S721).

When it is determined by the processing of S720 that the opening buffer 262h does not have the door opening information (S720: No), and after the processing of S721, whether or not the error buffer 262i has the error information. Is determined (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by RTC266 (S723). ..

When it is determined by the processing of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the processing of S723, the current time indicated by the RTC266 is the midnight time zone (midnight 0). It is determined whether or not it is between 0:00 and 6:00 in the early morning (S724). Normally, the midnight time zone is outside business hours, so the fact that the interrupt signal was transmitted from the MPU201 during this midnight time zone and this setting information reception process was executed means that some kind of fraudulent activity was performed during the midnight time zone. It is also thought that it was broken. Therefore, if it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is in the midnight time zone (S724: Yes), in order to keep a record to that effect, the current overtime information is indicated by RTC266 in the overtime data 264j. Set (add and store) in accordance with the time (S725).

When it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is not in the midnight time zone (S724: No), and after the processing of S725, it is subsequently determined whether or not there is jackpot information in the jackpot middle buffer 262g (S726). If the jackpot information is in the jackpot medium buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot medium data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC266 (S727).

When it is determined by the processing of S726 that there is no jackpot information in the jackpot medium buffer 262g (S726: No), and after the processing of S727, the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to each winning opening and the out switch 208f are set. The values are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263 (S728).

Specifically, the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first start port 64a (that is, the number of balls winning in the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start port 64b (that is, the number of balls winning in the second start port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 64b is accumulated in the starting 2 counter 263b.

The value set in the normal 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first normal winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls winning in the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a is accumulated in the normal 1 counter 263a. The value set in the normal 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second normal winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b is accumulated in the normal 2 counter 263b. The value set in the large winning opening buffer 262e corresponding to the large winning opening 65a (that is, the number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the large winning opening counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls that have won the big prize opening 65a is accumulated in the large winning opening counter 263e.

The counters 263a to 264f and the data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 set the initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when the power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the accessory ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be executed later when the calculation timing is reached. As a result, in the first reading memory 263, the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while accumulating until the next timing for calculating the accessory ratio. ..

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 20, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued. After the processing of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is the "number of shots" (S729: "number of shots"), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, the game). It is determined whether or not the number of balls launched into the region) is equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of balls” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , S734. The details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. On the other hand, if the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” (S730: No), the process proceeds to S734 as it is.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the bonus ratio by the number of fired balls, it is possible to always calculate the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio while a predetermined ball is fired. Therefore, since many balls can calculate the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio at the stage when the prize balls are won in various winning openings, the averaged bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated. can. Therefore, since it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in a short time in a normal game, it is possible to more easily analyze the fraudulent activity in the inspection device 300.

In the processing of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), the current time indicated by RTC266 is , It is determined whether or not the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, the term "reached" includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC266 coincides with the "predetermined time" but also the case where the "predetermined time" has passed for the first time.

If it is determined by the processing of S731 that the current time indicated by RTC266 has reached the "predetermined time" (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the bonus ratio. Then, the bonus ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by RTC266 has not reached the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds to S734 as it is.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the bonus ratio by the current time, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 does not play much games, the bonus ratio is surely reached by the arrival of a predetermined time. And the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to make the inspection device 300 surely analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent activity by the reliably calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is "game time" (S729: "game time"), the player on the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether or not the cumulative time (game time) in which the game has been played is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

Here, the game time can be calculated by, for example, the following method. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. The game time counter has an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, like other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be executed later when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, in the setting information reception process, the value of the out buffer 262f is confirmed, and if a value of 1 or more is set, a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, a ball is placed in the game area. Since it means that it has been fired, the game time counter is incremented by 1. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

If it is determined by the processing of S732 that the game time is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" (S732: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio calculation process is executed. (S733), shift to S734. On the other hand, if the game time is less than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds to S734 as it is.

The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are originally calculated by performing a test firing test of a game ball for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the bonus ratio by the game time, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio close to the original definition can be calculated by the bonus ratio management chip. The analysis can be performed using the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio that are close to the original definition.

In the process of S734, all the buffers 262 are initialized to 0 (S734). As a result, even if there is a buffer that is not set for each of the buffers 262a to 262i in the setting of the winning information, the out information, and the game information from the next MPU 201, it is possible to suppress that meaningless data remains in the buffer. It is possible to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the processing of S734, the setting information reception processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the bonus ratio calculation process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the bonus ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio calculation process. The bonus ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording them in the second reading memory 264, and the timing for calculating the bonus ratio ( It is executed when it becomes a trigger (see FIG. 20) and also when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18).

In the bonus ratio calculation process, first, the bonus ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and is added to the bonus ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by RTC266. And record (S740). Next, the continuous bonus ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and is added to and recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the current time indicated by RTC266 (S741). ).

The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls winning in the first starting port 64a indicated by the starting 1 counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263 and the number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b indicated by the starting 2 counter 263b. , The number of balls that have won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the normal 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening counter 263e. The prize associated with each winning opening shown in the winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a. By multiplying the number of balls, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out in association with winning the winning opening is calculated. Then, by totaling these, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

Then, with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out with the winning of the second starting port 64b and the balls paid out with the winning of the large winning opening 65a. By calculating the ratio of the total to the number, the bonus ratio is calculated. Further, the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out in association with the winning of the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

Originally, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio refer to the above ratios when the test firing test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but in the present embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the prize ratio shown in 202f, the player is asked to wait until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with winning the second starting port 64b and the large winning opening 65a is calculated as the bonus ratio. Then, it is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Also, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the timing is reached for the first time, or between the previous timing and the current timing, a big prize is won. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the winning of the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous bonus ratio, and is recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is turned off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used, and the power is paid out while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio. The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated based on the number of balls (prize balls), and are recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a or the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the time at that time, respectively. .. As a result, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated and recorded, and even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are not leaked. The ratio can be calculated.

Next, the value of the out counter 263f indicating the total number of balls fired into the game area is added to and recorded in the fired ball number data 264c together with the current time indicated by the RTC266 (S742). Further, various jackpot information stored in the jackpot data 263g, opening data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j, door opening information, error information, and overtime information are associated with each information. The time (the time when the information is stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from the oldest time information, added to the game state data 264d, and recorded (S743).

In the processing of S743, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the jackpot is continuously generated as a gaming state, so that it is the oldest time. Only the jackpot information and the time of the game are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, in the case of door opening information, error information, and overtime information, if each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and its time are stored, respectively. Only is recorded in the game state data 264d. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be kept small.

As described above, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 receives the winning information, the out information, and the information regarding the game state from the MPU 201, the first reading memory 263 accumulates and temporarily stores the information. Each time the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. As a result, the accessory ratio and the like can be managed with a small storage capacity, and information regarding the accessory ratio and the like can be transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Further, the second reading memory 264 also stores the time when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the second reading memory 264, not only the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, but also the information indicating the total number of balls fired into the game area is recorded at the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Information about the game status (big hit information, door open information, error information, overtime information) is recorded together with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the second reading memory. It is stored in 264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the inspection device 300, if there is a large change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio, the changed bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is the first. 2 By analyzing the total number of balls fired in the game area and the game state near the time recorded in the reading memory 264, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

Here, the information regarding the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the total number of balls fired into the game area, which can be recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c, is a predetermined number (respectively). For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of hit information, door opening information, error information, and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of launched balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is there. Is recorded.

Specifically, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured by a ring buffer, and a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer is prepared for each. By shifting the writing position by 1 each time information is written, it is possible to realize a process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there.

In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the maximum number of information to be recorded in each data is reached, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can analyze the latest information including the state of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

After the processing of S743, all the first reading memories 263 are initialized to 0 (S744). As a result, the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while accumulating again until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached by the first reading memory 263. ..

When the process of S744 is completed, the accessory ratio calculation process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output process. This inspection result output process is executed based on the interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, the data of the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

When the inspection result output process is executed, first, all the bonus ratios recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a and the bonus ratios associated with each bonus ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The set time is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the accessory ratio with the oldest recording time (S751).

Specifically, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the bonus ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 first writes the bonus ratio information in the bonus ratio data 264a. Information on the bonus ratio recorded from the position to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information on the bonus ratio at the latest time is recorded). It is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, that is). The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written is shifted by one from the position where the information of the accessory ratio of the oldest time is recorded (that is, the position of the latest time). The information recorded up to the position where the object ratio information is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the oldest time.

Next, all the continuous bonus ratios recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b and the time when the continuous bonus ratio associated with each continuous bonus ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 are set. , Output to the inspection device 300 in order from the accessory ratio with the oldest recording time (S752).

Specifically, when the continuous bonus ratio data 264b does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 first displays the continuous bonus ratio information in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b. The continuous combination recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information on the continuous accessory ratio at the latest time is recorded). Information on the object ratio is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, that is). , The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written by shifting the position to read the information one by one in order from the position where the information of the continuous accessory ratio of the oldest time is recorded (that is, the latest time). The information recorded up to the position where the information on the continuous accessory ratio of the above is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the continuous accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the oldest time.

Next, the information on the number of balls (number of shots) fired to all the game areas recorded in the number of shots data 264c and the information on the number of shots associated with the information on each number of shots are the first. 2 The time recorded in the reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the accessory ratio with the oldest recording time (S753).

Specifically, when the maximum number of recordable information (predetermined number) is not satisfied in the launch ball number data 264c, the CPU 261 first writes the launch ball number information in the launch ball number data 264c. Information on the number of launching balls recorded from the position to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information on the number of launching balls at the latest time is recorded). It is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the launch ball number data 264c, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, that is). The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written is shifted by one from the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the oldest time is recorded (that is, the position where the information is written at the latest time). The information recorded up to (the position where the information on the number of balls is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the oldest time.

Next, all the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error in-time information, and the overtime information recorded in the game state data 264d, and the time when the information associated with each information is stored in the first reading memory 263. Is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information (S754).

Specifically, when the game state data 264d does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 starts from the position where the information is first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the writing position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the game state data 264d, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the most). The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written is shifted by one from the position where the old time information is recorded (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded). ) Are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As described above, in the game state data 264d, each information regarding the game state is arranged (sorted) from the old time information and recorded in the game state data 264d. Therefore, the information on the game state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

By the processing of S751 to S754, each information is output in order from the oldest time, so that the inspection device 300 analyzes each information in the order of output, so that the accessory ratio with the passage of time can be determined. Changes in the ratio of continuous characters, the number of shot balls, and the gaming state can be easily analyzed.

After the processing of S754, the inspection result output processing is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 is provided with the bonus ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 calculates the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. And record. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information regarding the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio recorded in the bonus ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b to guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big hit by increasing the prizes. In addition, there are some who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the large prize opening 65a by some method or guiding the ball to the large winning opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if the fraudulent activity is performed, the fraudulent activity is performed. Can be found.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on the information on the number of balls fired into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU201, ROM202, and the like. As a result, it is difficult for the fraudster to modify the winning information or the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated and output by the bonus ratio management chip 207.

Further, since the MPU 201 is provided with a dedicated character ratio management chip 207 for managing the character ratio, etc., instead of having the MPU 201 manage the character ratio, etc., it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the MPU 201, and the main game is played. The MPU 201 can be devoted to various controls.

Further, the prize ball number data setting area 265a is provided on the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a when the power is supplied. Then, the prize ball ratio management chip 207 calculates the prize ball ratio and the continuous prize ball ratio using the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. As a result, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the manufacture of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, when the models of the pachinko machines are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and the bonus ratio can be accurately calculated even if the same bonus ratio management chip 207 is used between the pachinko machines of different models.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 23, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S915 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S915. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S915 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S915 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S915 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the data is transferred to the S808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S915, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S915 is executed, the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S808 is performed via the processing of S804 to S806. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S810, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process shifts to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S809 is that when the processing of S808 is reached via the processing of S804 to S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S901: No). , S902 to S908 are not performed, and the process proceeds to S910. In the processing of S901, it is not necessary to process in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) in S902 to S908 to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas in the variable display processing of S910. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S911 or S911 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S902. When the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process directly proceeds to the process of S902.

In the process of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the stage is changed and the rear image of the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expected value of the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production. It may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S905 is omitted.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S905) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S906), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S907, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal display execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time. After the processing of S908, the process proceeds to the processing of S910.

In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Executes the variable display process, which is the process set for transmission. The details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. Then, after the fluctuation display processing, a command determination processing is performed (S911), in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off process is executed (S915). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to the process of S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. Whether or not it is determined (S1001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is issued. Used when setting.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. ..

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the variation start flag to ON by the process of S1005, in the variation display process executed later, based on the variation pattern extracted from the previously received variation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command. , A display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types are generated, and a process for transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1003 (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold of the hold variable effect). The number of balls) is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1007).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the starting winning prize is given. Each time, by the process of S1007, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the number of reserved balls of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the hold balls of the voice lamp control device 113 are held when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received reserved ball count command is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 when the balls win the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (starting winning). It was done. The voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. It is possible to decide the execution of various effects.

Next, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the hold ball number stored in the RAM 223 by the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number symbol according to the reserved ball number.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1006 (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. .. The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, it is confirmed and displayed.

If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1010 (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1012), the process shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1013, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then is the command output process of the main process (S902). ) Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the variation display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S910).

This variation display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control unit 110, these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. It is a process to do.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, this fluctuation display processing is performed. Exit and return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and it is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1002 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 25). The variation pattern in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation is selected from the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (variation time). A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is set (S1104).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. , The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1105 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. do.

Next, the value of the number of reserved balls in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 in accordance with the setting of the variable pattern command for display and the consumption of the reserved balls (that is, the setting of the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls is made). (S1107), a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the held ball number after the update is set (S1108). Then, it returns to the main process.

The display reserved ball count command set by the process of S1108 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. .. The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is started when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

When the power is turned on and the main process is executed by the MPU 231, the initial setting process is first executed (S1401). Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 235 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the decompressed character information is stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234. The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, make other settings necessary for initialization.

When the initial setting process is completed, the interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (c). FIG. 27 (c) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. And display is instructed to the image controller 236.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 236, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), first, the command determination process (S1602) is executed. In this command determination process (S1602), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the variation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. And start controlling the display.

When the display stop type command is stored, high-speed fluctuation is in progress so that the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command. While the variable display of the third symbol is performed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be recognized by the player), the displayed third symbol is replaced. When the display confirmation command is stored, the drawing and display of the image are controlled so that the confirmation display is performed in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

By the way, in this command determination process (S1602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and other effects selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be quickly grasped. Can be controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the command determination process (S1602) is completed, the display setting process (S1603) is then executed. In the display setting process (S1603), one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) or the like. The content of the image of is specifically specified.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, the task process is then executed (S1064). In this task process, based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1603), the characters (sprites, display objects) constituting the image In addition to specifying the type, various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

Then, the drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined in the task process (S1503) are transmitted to the image controller 236. As a result, the image controller 236 executes the image drawing process according to these information, and at the same time, displays the image drawn according to the information received 1V before on the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Control is performed to transmit the image data to the third symbol display device 81.

After that, after executing other necessary processing, for example, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the bonus ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 serves. Calculate and record the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information regarding the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio recorded in the bonus ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b to guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big hit by increasing the prizes. In addition, there are some who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the large prize opening 65a by some method or guiding the ball to the large winning opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if the fraudulent activity is performed, the fraudulent activity is performed. Can be found.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on the information on the number of balls fired into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263. Was calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, each of them is recorded in the first reading memory 263. The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as they are, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 as they are.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment in the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment is that in the second reading memory of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio data 264a of the first embodiment and the continuation Instead of the accessory ratio data 264b, the winning counter data 264e is recorded.

Further, in the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

That is, in the trigger information data 202f, the "number of shots", "time", and "time" are used as triggers (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. Information indicating any of the "game times" is specified.

When the information indicating the "number of shots" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the first reading is performed every time the number of shot balls reaches 500 balls. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

When the information indicating the "time" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "time" and information indicating 12 o'clock, 17 o'clock, 19 o'clock, and 22 o'clock as "predetermined time", the time is 12 o'clock. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

When the information indicating the "game time" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the bonus ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating 2 hours as "predetermined time", the first reading memory 263 is used every time the game time elapses for 2 hours. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

The winning counter data 264e is used at the start 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) of recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that won the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls that won the second starting port 64b counted by the first 2 counter 263b, and the first normal counted by the normal 1 counter 263c. The total number of balls that won the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls that won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening 65a counted by the large winning opening counter 263e. It is the data recorded together with the total number of spheres and the time at the timing of recording.

The total number of balls that have won in each winning opening during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is the counter 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning opening. Indicated by. When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC266 at that time. It is recorded in the winning counter data 264e together with the time of.

The winning counter data 264e was associated with one time, and the total number of balls that won the first starting opening 64a, the total number of balls that won the second starting opening 64b, and the first ordinary winning opening 63a were won. The total number of balls, the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a may be recorded.

Further, in the winning counter data 264e, an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64b, and a winning in the first normal winning opening 63a. An area for recording the total number of balls won, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a are provided, and the first reading memory is provided. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the 263 to the second reading memory 264 is reached, the total number of balls winning in the corresponding winning openings is set for each area. The winning opening counter data 264e may be configured so as to be recorded together with the time at the timing.

Here, the information regarding the total number of balls won in each winning opening that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, the total number of balls that won the first starting port 64a, the total number of balls that won the second starting port 64b, and the total number of balls that won the first ordinary winning opening 63a in association with one time. When the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b and the total number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If so, the oldest time information is erased and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e is configured like a ring buffer, a memory for managing the position where information is written is separately prepared on the ring buffer, and the position where information is written is shifted by 1 each time the information is written. Then, the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. Further, when the information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 includes the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. You can have the analysis done.

An area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first normal winning opening 63a are recorded. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for recording the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a. , A ring buffer may be configured for each area, an upper limit may be set for the number of information that can be recorded in each area, and the control may be performed as described above. As a result, when the maximum number of information to be recorded is reached in each area, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 includes the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. You can have the analysis done.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated to the CPU 261, and the winning counter data 264e, the launch ball number data 264c, and the game state data recorded in the second reading memory 264 by the CPU 261 are generated. 264d and 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 sets each information recorded in the respective data 264e, 264c, 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). , Read in the order of recording and send to the inspection device 300.

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number) specified for each, the CPU 261 first informs the data. The information recorded from the position where the information was written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read out and inspected. It is transmitted to the device 300. On the other hand, when the data for transmitting information to the inspection device 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number above) specified for each, it is indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written. The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written is shifted by one from the position next to the position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded). , The position where the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

An area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64b, and an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first normal winning opening 63a are recorded. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b and an area for recording the total number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a. By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls that have won the winning openings is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information for each winning opening. Become.

Next, the winning information storage process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this winning information storage process. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is reached (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18). A bonus ratio calculation process was executed in which the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio were calculated from the above and recorded in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 21), but in the second embodiment, the bonus ratio is stored in the first reading memory 263. When it is the timing (trigger) to record each information in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), a prize is won instead of the accessory ratio calculation process. Execute information storage processing. This winning information storage process is a process of recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

In the winning information storage process, first, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 and corresponding to the winning openings are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC266, and the second reading memory 264 It is additionally recorded in addition to the winning counter data 264e (S761). As a result, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to this time. The total number of balls winning in the first start port 64a counted by the start 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second start port 64b counted by the start 2 counter 263b until the timing of The total number of winning balls, the total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the normal 1 counter 263c, and the balls winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a counted by the large winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

Also, even when the power is turned off, while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) when recording to the latest second reading memory 264 using the power charged in the capacitor 267. In addition, the total number of balls that have won the first start port 64a counted by the start 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the total number of balls that have won the second start port 64b counted by the start 2 counter 263b. And, the total number of balls that won the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the normal 1 counter 263c, the total number of balls that won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the big prize. The total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a counted by the mouth counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, even if the prize is won in each prize opening during the time when it is judged that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) of recording to the latest second reading memory 264, the prize is won. The total number of balls can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning opening.

In the following S742 to S744, the same processing (see FIG. 21) as in S742 to S744 of the accessory ratio calculation processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the winning information storage processing is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output process. This inspection result output process is executed based on the interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, as in the first embodiment. In the inspection result output process, the data of the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e is associated with each information, and the recording time together with the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Outputs to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed following the processing of S772, the same processing as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the inspection result output processing is terminated.

The inspection device 300 calculates the bonus ball ratio and the continuous bonus ball ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning slot output in S772 and the prize ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are analyzed. Then, when the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on the information on the number of balls fired into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to. Further, by the processing of S772, the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening is output in order from the oldest time, so that the inspection device 300 analyzes each information in the order of output. , Changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio with the passage of time can be easily analyzed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, every time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b is reached in the accessory ratio management chip 207. The values of the counters 263a to 263e that count the total number of winning balls for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is the prize ball number table 202e. Together with, it is transmitted to the inspection device 300.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the total number of balls won in the corresponding winning openings is obtained for each winning opening and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the second reading memory 264 is larger than that for recording the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated as in the first embodiment in the second reading memory 264, but the inspection Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the device 300, if there is a large change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 Therefore, by referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

Further, the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening transmitted to the inspection device 300 is associated with the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. To. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening, the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is significantly changed. , Specify the time when the total number of balls won in each winning opening used to calculate the changed bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and in the vicinity of that time, By analyzing the total number of balls won in each winning opening, the total number of balls fired in the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can exhibit the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 manages information regarding the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10. explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 201 manages the information regarding the accessory ratio. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a combination ratio display device 400, and displays information on the combination ratio on the combination ratio display device 400.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The description is omitted.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment is that the configuration of the main control device 110 is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

As described above, the main control device 110 of the third embodiment is not provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the MPU 201 manages information regarding the accessory ratio. Specifically, the bonus ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the bonus ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. .. At this time, each counter and data stored in the first reading memory 263 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

Further, the second reading memory 264 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 in a form connected to the input / output port 205. Further, as the RTC266 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the RTC266 built in (not shown) in the MPU 201 is used in the third embodiment.

Further, the inspection terminal 207a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input / output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes an inspection result output process, and information on the accessory ratio and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Further, the combination ratio display device 400 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The combination display device 400 is composed of, for example, a plurality of 7-segment displays and is arranged on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, it is assembled so that the display screen of the combination ratio display device 400 can be seen when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed. It may be assembled so that the display screen of the combination ratio display device 400 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

The bonus ratio display device 400 displays information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio (for example, a base value, etc.). The information regarding the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the winning combination display device 400 may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning opening, or all winnings. The total number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the mouth, the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the winning opening (2nd starting port 64b and the large winning opening 65a) in which the accessory operates, and the accessory are continuous. It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the winning opening (large winning opening 65a) that operates. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (number of fired balls) may be included in the information regarding the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the combination ratio display device 400. The combination ratio display device 400 is composed of a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display, or the like instead of the 7-segment display, and the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the combination. , Information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may be displayed.

The MPU 201 has a ROM 202 and a RAM 203 built-in, and also has a plurality of registers 200 for storing various data at the layer closest to the ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) which is the heart of the MPU 201. The plurality of registers 200 are generally used in various situations without having a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding a value in the middle of calculation or storing a memory address required for processing. It includes various registers such as a general-purpose register and an accumulator register for accumulating and summing ALU calculation results.

Further, the plurality of registers 200 also include a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) configured by a flag indicating overflow by an ALU operation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, or the like. Due to the nature of the register, the flag register 200a can be updated every time one instruction is executed.

The RAM 203 is provided with an area inside the used area 203x and an area outside the used area 203y, which are a work area (inner work area 203x1 and an outer work area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stack area 203x2 and an outer stack area 203y2, respectively). ) And are provided.

This is stored in the RAM 203 when the MPU 201 is configured to manage the information regarding the accessory ratio while the MPU 201 mainly controls the game, and various counters used for the main control of the game. This is because it is necessary to prevent the data from being stored in the RAM 203 and accidentally destroyed by various counters and data used for managing information on the accessory ratio. That is, various counters and data used for the main control of the game must be protected with priority in order to protect the interests of the player. Further, as for the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when the main control of the game is performed, the main control of the game continues again without any problem after the processing related to the management of the information regarding the accessory ratio is performed on the way. It must be ensured to be protected so that it can be done.

Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various counters and data used for the main control of the game in the work area 203x1 of the area 203x in the used area, and also stores the stack area when performing the main control of the game. The data to be saved in is saved in the stack area 203x2 in the area 203x in the used area. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for managing information on the bonus ratio in the work area 203y1 outside the used area 203y, and also in the stack area when managing information on the bonus ratio. The data to be saved is saved in the outer stack area 203y2 of the area outside the used area 203y. This makes it possible to reliably protect various counters and data used for the main control of the game, and data saved in the stack area when the control is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, it is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a game process that mainly controls the game is executed (S2001). For example, the processing of S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment is executed by the processing of S2001. That is, the main controls of the game include a lottery for big hits, setting of variable display, opening / closing control of the big winning opening (large opening opening) 65a at the time of big hits, and lottery for winning the second symbol display device 83. .. As described above, the MPU 201 uses the used area area 203x (inner work area 203x1 and inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S2001.

Next, a role ratio process for managing information regarding the accessory ratio is executed (S2002). The details of the combination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After the processing of S2002, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the game processing is performed first, and then the winning combination processing is performed, so that the main control of the game, which is an important control, is preferentially executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the details of the winning combination processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the combination ratio processing. In this combination processing, interrupting is first prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved in the inner stack area 203x2 by the PUSH instruction (S2012), and then the combination main processing is executed by the CALL instruction. Read the subroutine program to be executed, and execute the role ratio main process (S2013). The details of the role ratio main process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. At the stage of processing S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing using the area 203x in the used area of the RAM 203.

When the processing of S2013 is completed and the subroutine program of the combination ratio main processing returns to this combination processing, then the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is restored by the POP instruction (S2015), and the interrupt is generated. The inclusion is permitted (S2016), and then the combination processing is terminated. As for the processing of S2015 and S2016, the MPU 201 also executes the processing using the area 203x in the used area of the RAM 203.

In the processing of S2012, the flag register 200a was saved in the inner work area 200x1 by using the load (LD) instruction, and in the processing of S2014, the flag register 200a was saved in the inner work area 200x1 by using the load (LD) instruction. The flag register 200a may be restored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the details of the combination ratio main processing (S2013) executed by reading the subroutine program by the combination ratio processing (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the combination ratio main process.

In the role ratio main process, first, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set at the start position of the outer stack area 203y2 by the load (LD) instruction (S2021). As a result, in the subsequent processing, the data is saved in the outer stack area 203y2. Further, after this process, the MPU 201 uses the outside work area 203y1 as the work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 uses the outer work area 203y1 to store various counters and data, and also uses the outer stack area 203y2 as needed.

Next, among the registers 200, the registers 200 (excluding the flag register 200a) used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually placed in the areas determined in each of the outer work areas 203y1 by the load (LD) instruction. Evacuate (S2022). Then, the process related to the accessory ratio is executed (S2023).

In the process of S2023, for example, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the same process as the accessory ratio management main process (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. Also, a process of controlling the display of the combination ratio display device 400 is executed. Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 30). The same process as in S2023 may be executed in the process of S2023.

When the processing of S2023 is completed, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is then set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). As a result, in the subsequent processing, data is started again in the inner stack area 203x2.

Here, the role ratio process (S2002) in which the combination ratio main process (S2013) is executed is a game process (S2001) that executes the main control of the game in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 31. It is done after the end. Further, the timer interrupt process is read when the counter update process (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701 to S703) of the main process (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201. And executed.

Therefore, when the process of S2020 is executed, the data saved when shifting from the main process to the timer interrupt process and the flag register 200a saved by the process of S2012 are stored in the inner stack area 203x2. It is saved (however, when the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 200x1 by the load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of the saved data is fixed. Therefore, in the process of S2012, when the stack pointer is specified at the position stacked in the inner stack area 203x2, the position can be reliably specified only by setting the fixed address for the stack pointer. Since it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2 before moving the stack pointer from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before executing the process of S2012). It is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 due to the evacuation.

Next, the value of each register 200 individually saved in the determined area of the outer work area 203y1 by the processing of S2022 is set from the determined area of the outer work area 203y1 corresponding to the load (LD) instruction. It is restored by reading it out and setting it in the corresponding register 200 (S2025). Then, after the processing of S2025, the combination ratio main processing is terminated, and the process returns to the combination ratio processing. Further, after the processing of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 as the work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 to store various counters and data, and also uses the inner stack area 203x2 as needed.

As described above, in the MPU 201, when the process (S2023) relating to the accessory ratio is executed, each process is executed by using the area outside the used area 203y (outside work area 203y1 and outside stack area 203y2), but the use thereof. At the stage of shifting to the processing of S2023 using the out-of-area area 203y, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the processing related to this accessory ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. do. Then, before the processing of S2023 is completed and the MPU 201 returns to the processing using the area 203x in the used area, the registers 200 saved in the outer working area 203y1 are returned to the corresponding registers 200 individually. After that, a game process that mainly controls the game is executed using the area 203x (inner work area 203x1 and inner stack area 203x2) in the used area.

Here, from the game process in which the main control of the game using the used area area 203x is performed, the process related to the bonus ratio using the used area area 203y is performed, and the game using the used area area 203x again. When returning to the game processing that performs the main control of the game, the game that performs the main control of the game because the protection of the interests of the player and the fact that the main control of the game must be continued without any problem again. The processing must not be affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into a used area area 203x used for the main control processing of the game and a used area outside area 203y used for the processing related to the accessory ratio. However, since the register 200 has a smaller capacity than the RAM 203 and there is also a register 200 for which the purpose of use is specified, the register 200 used in the main control processing of the game and the processing related to the accessory ratio. Is impossible or difficult to separate.

Further, before and after the processing related to the accessory ratio, in other words, the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed is shifted to the processing related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area. The contents of the register 200 are the same at the stage of shifting from the processing related to the bonus ratio using the area 203y outside the used area to the game processing of performing the main control of the game using the area 203x inside the used area. Therefore, there is also a demand to ensure that the game processing that mainly controls the game is not affected by the processing related to the bonus ratio executed between them.

On the other hand, before performing the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area outside the used area 203y, the contents of all the registers 200 are collectively saved in the outer stack area 203y2 by using the PUSH instruction, and the processing related to the accessory ratio is performed. After that, a method of collectively returning all the registers 200 from the outer stack area 203y2 by using the POP instruction is also conceivable. However, in this case, in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, it is necessary to set a large capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 in advance, and the capacity of the outer work area 200y1 becomes smaller or the RAM 203 has a large capacity. Must be converted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is provided when shifting from the game process of mainly controlling the game using the area 203x in the used area to the process related to the bonus ratio using the area 203y outside the used area. Of the registered registers 200, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the winning combination ratio are individually saved in the outer working area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the processing related to the winning combination processing is executed, the area outside the used area 203y is moved. When shifting (returning) from the processing related to the accessory ratio to be used to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed (returning), the registers 200 saved in the outer work area 203y1 are individually restored. As a result, the stage of shifting from the game process of mainly controlling the game using the area 203x in the used area to the process related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area and the combination of using the area 203y outside the used area. Since the contents of the register 200 can be made the same at the stage of shifting from the processing related to the object ratio to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed, the game in which the main control of the game is performed. It is possible to ensure that the processing is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed between them.

Further, the stage of shifting from the game process of mainly controlling the game using the area 203x in the used area to the process related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area, and the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area. At the stage of shifting from the processing related to the ratio to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x in the used area, the processing related to the accessory ratio is performed instead of saving / restoring the contents of all the registers 200. Since the contents of only some of the registers 200 used in the above are saved / restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (outside work area 203y1) required for saving the contents of the registers can be suppressed. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and a large area for storing other data or the like can be secured in the outside work area 203y1.

The register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the bonus ratio is not affected by the processing related to the bonus ratio in the first place, and its contents are retained before and after the processing related to the bonus ratio is executed. Therefore, without saving / restoring the contents of the register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the accessory ratio, only the contents of only some registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are saved / restored. It can be ensured that the game processing that mainly controls the game is not affected by the processing related to the bonus ratio executed between them.

However, since the flag register 200a is a register used in all the instructions executed by the MPU 201, it is naturally a register also used for the processing related to the accessory ratio, but in the processing of S2022, the flag register 200a is used. Exceptionally does not evacuate. This is because the content of the flag register 200a changes only by reading the combination ratio main process (S2013) in the combination ratio processing shown in FIG. 33, and the game processing that executes the main control of the game shifts to the processing related to the combination ratio. This is because the value of the flag register at the time when the game processing is completed cannot be saved at the processing stage of S2022.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, before reading the combination ratio main process (S2013) in the combination ratio processing shown in FIG. 33, only the flag register 200a is saved in the inner stack area 203x2, and after the combination ratio main processing (S2013) is completed. , Only the flag register 200a is restored from the inner stack area 203x2. As a result, the value of the flag register at the time when the game processing is completed can be reliably restored after the processing related to the bonus ratio is executed.

Further, the stage of shifting from the game process of mainly controlling the game using the area 203x in the used area to the process related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area, and the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area. Since the save / return of the register 200 at the stage of shifting from the process related to the ratio to the game process in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed, the save / return of the register 200 is performed individually for each register. Only the registers 200 that need to be evacuated / restored to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed between them (that is, used for the processing related to the accessory ratio). Only the register 200) can be individually specified to save / restore it.

Further, since the register 200 is retracted to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, the capacity required for the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be largely secured. Further, in the MPU 201, the stack area and the work area may be designated in advance depending on the model (type). Such an MPU 201 has a function of clearing (initializing to 0) the contents of the RAM 203 itself when data is further saved and stacked beyond the area of the stack area specified in advance. be. On the other hand, by saving the register 200 to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the outer stack area 203y2 from being immediately filled with the stacked data. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared because the data is further stacked beyond the predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2.

Further, since the register 200 is saved by using the load (LD) instruction instead of being saved by using the PUSH instruction / POP instruction, the place to save can be fixed by the program. Therefore, while the processing related to the accessory ratio is being performed, the game in which the main control of the game is performed by clearly avoiding the area where the register 200 is saved and programming to use the outside work area 203y1. The contents of the register 200 used in the processing can be reliably protected.

When all the registers 200 are used in the processing related to the accessory ratio, all the registers 200 are saved / restored to the determined area of the outside work area 203y1 by individually using the load (LD) instruction. You may let it. Even with this, the effect of retracting the register 200 to the outside work area 200y1 can be enjoyed.

Further, when saving some of the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio, the PUSH instruction is individually used to save the registers to the determined area of the outer stack area 203y2, and the outer stack area 203y2 is determined. The registers 200 saved in the area may be individually restored by using the POP instruction. As a result, the capacity of the RAM 203 required to save the contents of the register can be suppressed. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and a large area for storing the outside work area 203y1 can be secured. In this case, when the register 200 saved by using the POP instruction is restored, it is necessary to restore the register 200 saved by the LIFO method, that is, the PUSH instruction later, by the POP instruction first. ..

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can exhibit the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the main control device 110 shifts from the game process of mainly controlling the game using the area 203x in the used area to the process related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area. At this stage, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the bonus ratio are individually saved, and after the processing related to the bonus ratio is completed, the processing related to the bonus ratio using the area 203y outside the used area is started in the used area. A case has been described in which the saved registers 200 are individually restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x is performed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the main control device 110, the area 203x in the used area is used in the accessory process (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32). Register 200 used in the processing related to the bonus ratio at the stage of reading the bonus main process (S2013) for executing the process related to the bonus ratio using the area 203y outside the used area by the CALL instruction during the process. Are individually cleared to 0, and the accessory main process (S2013) is read by the CALL instruction. Further, in the accessory main process (S2013), at the stage of ending the accessory main process (S2013) that uses the area 203y outside the used area and returning to the process that uses the area 203x inside the used area, the process related to the accessory ratio. After clearing the registers 200 used in the above to 0 individually, the process returns to the combination processing.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments. The explanation is omitted.

Compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a role ratio process (S2002) which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The partial processing and the partial processing of the combination main processing (S2013), which is one of the combination processing (S2002), are different.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the winning combination processing (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this combination ratio processing, first, the same processing of S2011 and S2012 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then all the registers 200 used in the processing related to the combination ratio (except for the flag register 200a). Is cleared to 0 individually by using the load (LD) instruction. Then, the process proceeds to S2013, the subroutine program that executes the role ratio main process that uses the area 203y outside the used area is read by the CALL instruction, and the role ratio main process is executed. Then, the same processing of S2014 and S2015 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then the combination ratio processing is terminated.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the combination ratio main process (S2013) in the fourth embodiment. In this role ratio main process, first, the same process of S2021 as in the third embodiment is executed, then the same process of S2023 as in the third embodiment (that is, the process related to the accessory ratio) is executed, and then the process is executed. Next, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same processing of S2024 as in the third embodiment is executed, the combination main processing using the area outside the used area 203y is terminated, the process returns to the combination processing, and the processing using the area 203x inside the used area is performed. Run.

In the fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area, the value is changed by the processing related to the accessory ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200. However, even if the MPU 201 executes a game process that mainly controls a game using the area 203x in the used area, it is premised that the game process is not affected at all. In this case, the MPU 201 is originally provided at the stage of shifting from the game process of mainly controlling the game using the area 203x in the used area to the process related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area. Of the registers 200, the register 200 used in the processing related to the bonus ratio is saved, the processing related to the bonus ratio is executed, and then the processing related to the bonus ratio using the area 203y outside the used area is performed in the used area. There is no problem even if the saved register 200 is not restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x is performed. However, in this case, the value of the register 200 changes before and after the processing related to the accessory ratio, so that an outsider cannot judge whether or not this is really a problem.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the combination ratio processing, the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed is shifted to the processing related to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area. At that stage, that is, before reading the subroutine program that executes the role ratio main process by the CALL instruction, all the registers 200 used in the process related to the role ratio performed in the role ratio main process are individually set to 0. Clear to. Then, in the role ratio main process, after the process related to the bonus ratio is executed, the game process in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed from the process related to the bonus ratio using the area 203y outside the used area. At the stage of transitioning to, all the registers 200 used in the processing related to the winning combination ratio (that is, the same register 200 as the register 200 cleared to 0 before executing the winning combination main processing) are individually set to 0. clear. As a result, there is a stage of shifting from a game process that mainly controls a game that uses the area 203x in the used area to a process related to a bonus ratio that uses the area 203y outside the used area (a stage that reads out the role ratio main process). The stage of shifting from the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x inside the used area (the stage of returning from the combination ratio main processing to the combination processing). Then, the contents of the register 200 can be made the same at first glance. Therefore, it can be ensured that the game processing that mainly controls the game is not affected by the processing related to the bonus ratio executed between the games. The contents of the register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the accessory ratio does not change before and after the processing related to the accessory ratio and continues to be held. Therefore, even if the unused register 200 is not cleared to 0, the register 200 is not used. It will be the same at both stages.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the case where the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 in the processing of S2031 and S2041 has been described, but it is not always necessary to clear to 0. For example, even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processing of S2031 and S2041, the above effect can be enjoyed. However, immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at the stage where software initialization is not executed), all the registers are initialized to 0, and S2031 and S2041 In the process of, it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio to 0. Further, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio to 0, it is possible to grasp at first glance that the registers 200 are cleared to 0.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 44. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, instead of the combination ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment, four 7-segment displays (lower right of the 7-segment portion) are used. A base display device 401 (see FIG. 38 (a)) composed of 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d (including a dot segment provided on the side) is provided. The base value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the base display device 401 as one of the information regarding the accessory ratio.

The base value is the number (ratio) of balls to be paid out (prize) for 100 balls in a big hit, a high probability (probability change), and a normal time excluding a short time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the game area to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls launched into the game area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game. Hereinafter, each time the number of outs reaches 60,000, the base value for the 60,000 spheres is measured and stored.

Then, the base display device 401 has a base value (hereinafter referred to as "real-time base value") measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and a previous (most recent) total number of outs. In addition to the base value measured when the number reaches 60,000 (hereinafter referred to as the "previous base value"), it is measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 one before the previous time (two times before). The base value (hereinafter referred to as "the base value before the previous time") and the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 one before the previous time (the time before the previous time) (hereinafter "the time before the previous time"). "Time-based value") is displayed by switching every predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). By displaying the base values for the past multiple times (previous base value, previous two times base value, previous two times base value) in addition to the real-time base value, it becomes possible to more accurately judge whether or not there was fraudulent activity. In addition, the time when the fraudulent activity occurred can be predicted to some extent.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Is configured to light for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In the base display device 401, if some segments are not lit due to a failure such as disconnection, the base value or the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment may be made in determining the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. By lighting all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 every time the power is turned on for a predetermined period, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on, and the base display device. It can be easily determined whether or not the display of 401 is normally performed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a new pachinko machine 10 such as when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at a manufacturing factory or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine. At the time of startup, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. .. In the new launch of the pachinko machine 10, in the shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, a ball may be manually inserted into each winning opening and the winning ball may be paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. In addition, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state by performing the display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments. The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is that the combination ratio display device 400 is connected to the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, whereas the fifth embodiment is connected to the main control device 110. In the embodiment, the base display device 401 can be connected to the main control device 110. As described above, the base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the combination ratio display device 400 in the third embodiment, the base value of the pachinko machine 10 may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals together with the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to provide the inspection terminal 207a, and it is not necessary to output the information regarding the accessory ratio to the inspection device 300. Further, when the information regarding the accessory ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

Here, the details of the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. First, FIG. 38 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device 401. In this base display device 401, four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are arranged side by side in a horizontal row, and are arranged on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, the display screen of the base display device 401 is assembled so as to be visible, and four-digit numbers or letters can be confirmed. It may be assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d has a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment portion in addition to the 7-segment portion. Of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d, the base display device 401 uses the two left 7-segment displays 401a and 401b as the identification segment and the two right 7-segment displays 401c and 401d as the ratio segment. do. The identification seg is used to indicate the identification information for specifying the content to be displayed on the ratio seg. The ratio seg is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information indicated by the identification seg.

FIG. 38B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 has a real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 last time (most recently). The previous base value measured in the previous time, the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 one before (two times before), and one before (two times before) before the previous time. ) The base value measured two times before when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is displayed by switching every 5 seconds.

When displaying the real-time base value in the base display device 401, "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the real-time base value being measured is displayed in the ratio segment in two digits. By displaying "bL." In the identification seg, it is possible to make the person who sees that the number displayed in the ratio seg is a real-time base value recognize.

When displaying the previous base value in the base display device 401, "b1." Is displayed in the identification segment and the previous base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b1." In the identification seg, it is possible to make the person who saw that the number displayed in the ratio seg is the base value last time recognize.

When displaying the base value two times before the previous time on the base display device 401, "b2." Is displayed on the identification segment and the base value two times before the previous time is displayed on the ratio segment in two digits. By displaying "b2." In the identification seg, it is possible to make the person who sees that the number displayed in the ratio seg is the base value two times before.

When displaying the base value two times before the previous time on the base display device 401, "b3." Is displayed on the identification segment and the base value two times before the previous time is displayed on the ratio segment in two digits. By displaying "b3." In the identification seg, it is possible to make the person who sees that the number displayed in the ratio seg is the base value two times before.

In this way, in addition to the real-time base value, the base display device 401 also displays the base values for the past multiple times (previous base value, previous two times base value, previous two times base value). Here, as described above, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000. Here, in general, in a hall, about 10,000 to 20,000 balls are launched per day for one pachinko machine 10, and a game is played. That is, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value measured for 60,000 spheres show the base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value is hidden on the base display device 401, it will take about 3 to 6 days to measure the base value for 60,000 spheres, so even if it is the previous base value, it will take about 3 to 6 days. It may be the base value 3-6 days ago. Therefore, if there is any fraudulent activity after the previous measurement of the base value, the base value for the next 60,000 spheres will be measured and displayed on the base display device 401 for 3 to 6 days. There is a risk that cheating cannot be detected. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the current base value can be shown as a breaking news value, so that if any fraudulent activity is performed, the fraudulent activity is immediately performed from the real-time base value. You can discover the possibility that there was an act.

On the other hand, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time when the total number of outs is less than 60,000, as described above. As described above, the base value is the number (ratio) of balls paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls in normal times, so what kind of transition is the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10? The real-time base value may fluctuate depending on the situation (for example, the normal state happens to continue for a long time, the jackpot state happens to occur frequently, the probabilistic state happens to continue for a long time, etc.). Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been an illegal act.

On the other hand, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value measured for 60,000 balls show the base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. No matter what kind of gaming state the pachinko machine 10 follows for the corresponding several days, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the base value measured for 60,000 spheres such as the previous base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to make a more accurate determination of the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, when only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, it is said that the player who happened to be accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 played the game during the period when the previous base value was measured. Then, the base value is generally lowered. Therefore, even when only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. On the other hand, by displaying not only the previous base value but also a plurality of base values such as the base value before the previous time and the base value before the previous time as the base values measured for 60,000 spheres, each base value is displayed. In, it is possible to determine whether or not the base value has changed based on the familiarity of the player who played the game. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.

In the present embodiment, the base display device 401 switches and displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time every 5 seconds. For example, the number of 7-segment displays. The mode of displaying the real-time base value and the previous base value at the same time and the mode of displaying the previous-previous base value and the previous-previous base value at the same time may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals. Further, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value may all be displayed on the base display device 401 at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the base value measured for 60,000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401 is displayed as the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value. However, you may display the previous base value and the previous two times base value, or in addition to the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value, from the previous two times base value. Also, the base value measured two times before (two times before) and measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 may be further displayed. That is, an arbitrary number of base values of 2 or more may be displayed as the base values measured for 60,000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. The base display device 401 is connected to the base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main control device 110 and connected to the input / output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on the drive / control signal from the MPU 201, and various types as shown in FIG. 38 (b). It is for displaying.

In the process for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the process is performed using the area 203y outside the used area of the RAM 203. That is, the information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the use area outside area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 stored in the outside work area 203y1 will be described. First, FIG. 39 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203.

As information necessary for displaying the base value stored in the outside work area 203y1, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, and the previous base value data At least 203n, base value data 203o two times before, new start-up flag 203p, and display type counter 203q are prepared.

Of these, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous two times base value data 203n, the previous two times base value data 203o, and the new start-up flag 203p are Even when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is being operated, the information is continuously retained without being initialized (cleared). As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before the operation is performed is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be made to. Further, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 can be displayed on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, only when the RAM total erasure switch (not shown) is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is housed and the power is turned on while the RAM total erasure switch is operated. Total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, previous two times base value data 203n, previous two times base value data 203o, RAM 203 including new start-up flag 203p It is designed to be initialized (cleared). Operate the RAM all-erasing switch when starting a new pachinko machine 10 at a manufacturing factory, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a used stand. By turning on the power while turning on the power, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous two times base value data 203n, the previous two times base value data 203o, new The rise flag 203p can be initialized, and the measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. In addition, even when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, by making it possible to initialize (clear) this information, cheating is performed in the previous hall and the base value. Even if the information has changed, it is possible to prevent the suspicion that there was fraudulent activity at the next store by continuously displaying the information at the next store. Further, since the RAM complete erase switch is provided in the board box 100 which is connected so as not to be opened, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect this information.

In addition, instead of the RAM all erasing switch, a hole such as a keyhole is provided, and only when a key or the like matching the hole is inserted, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, The previous base value data 203m, the previous two times base value data 203n, the previous two times base value data 203o, and the new rise flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those who have the key etc. that fits the hole can erase the information necessary for displaying the base value, so it is possible to prevent fraudsters from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value. , You can be sure to protect this information.

The total out number counter 203j is a counter for counting the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). The total out number counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM total erase switch, and when a ball is detected by the out switch 208g, the ball is guided to the ball discharge path. 1 is added as. Then, when the total out number counter 203j becomes 60,000, the MPU 201 determines that the total out number has reached 60,000, executes a predetermined process described later, and initially sets the total out number counter 203j to zero. To become. As a result, the total number of outs is counted again by the total number of outs counter 203j until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

The low probability payout number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in a big hit, a high probability (probability change), and a normal time excluding a short time. The low probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM total erase switch. Then, if there is a payout (prize ball) of a ball when the game state is normal, the number of the paid out balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

For example, in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 64a, which is a so-called "heso" whose opening is always open, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b, which are general winning openings, are used. When it is detected by the first starting port switch 208a, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d that there is a winning ball, the number of winning balls set for the corresponding winning opening is set. Is determined by the prize ball number table 202e (see FIGS. 6 and 9), and the prize ball number is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a "small hit" is provided as one aspect of "disengagement" and the large winning opening 65a is configured to be opened for several seconds and several times when the "small hit" is obtained, the game state. However, in normal times, when the large winning opening 65a in the "small hit" is opened, there is a ball in the large winning opening 65a, and if a winning ball is played, the number of winning balls is a low probability payout number counter 203k. May be added to. Further, when the game state is normal and there is a ball entering the second starting port 64b and a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls may be added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

The addition of the number of prize balls to the low probability payout number counter 203k is performed cumulatively until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000. That is, the value of the low probability payout number counter 203k when the total out number counter 203j is 60,000 is the value of the balls whose game state is normally paid out for the 60,000 balls launched into the game area. It becomes the number.

When the total number of outs counter 203j reaches 60,000, the low probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero together with the total number of outs counter 203j. As a result, the number of balls paid out in the normal state of the game is counted again by the low probability payout number counter 203k during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value every predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when the timer interrupt process is executed) by using the following equation (1).
Real-time base value = value of low probability payout number counter 203k / value of total out number counter 203j × 100 ... (1)
The real-time base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real-time base value. Further, the previous base value data 203m is the data indicating the previous base value, the previous two times base value data 203n is the data indicating the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value data 203o is the data indicating the previous two times base value. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39B, the configuration of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous-previous base value data 203n, and the previous-previous base value data 203o will be described. FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of each base value data 203l to 203o.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), each base value data 203l to 203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), the 7th bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag, and the rest. The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits) of. Each base value data 203l to 203o means that a valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits when the valid data flag is 1. On the other hand, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that the valid base value is not stored in the 0th to 6th bits when the valid data flag is 0.

When the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch, all the base value data 203l to 203o are initialized to zero for both the valid data flag and the base value. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch, valid data is not stored in all of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value.

After that, until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the base value of the real-time base value data 203l, while the real-time base value data 203l is stored in the real-time base value. The valid data flag of is left at 0. Then, in this case, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, "88." Is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is compared. Flashes (or lights up) on the segment.

As described above, the RAM complete erase switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine. It is something that is operated when you do. Then, in the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, in the shipping inspection or the like for quality confirmation of the pachinko machine 10, a ball may be manually inserted into each winning opening and the winning ball may be paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches 300 is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment. At the same time, by displaying the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, which blinks (or lights up) in the ratio segment, the displayed base value is normal. It can be shown that it is not the base value (valid base value) of. In addition, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state by performing the display. In this special display mode, both the identification segment "88." and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be turned on or blinked. Further, the identification seg "88." may be lit to blink the real-time base value of the ratio seg, or conversely, the identification seg "88." may be lit to light the real-time base value of the ratio seg. You may.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. As a result, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l becomes a valid base value. Therefore, based on the fact that the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1, "bL." Is lit in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment. By doing so, it is possible to notify a valid real-time base value.

On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flag remains 0 in all of the previous base value data 203m, the previous two times base value data 203n, and the previous two times base value data 203o. At this time, when the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base are displayed on the base display device 401 by switching every predetermined period, the identification seg is displayed corresponding to each base value, while the ratio seg. Turns on "---". As a result, it can be shown that a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value.

When the total number of outs counter 203j reaches 60,000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total number of outs of 60,000. Therefore, the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is shifted to the base value data 203o two times before the previous time, the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, and then the real-time base value data 203l is changed to the previous base value data 203m. Shift. As a result, the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is retained as the previous base value.

Here, when the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is set. Is also "1". Therefore, thereafter, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

Further, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the previous base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch). After all the initialization of the RAM 203 is executed, it corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the shift is set to "1". Therefore, thereafter, when displaying the base value two times before the previous time on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

Further, when shifting the base value data 203n two times before the previous time to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch). After it is turned on and all initialization of RAM 203 is executed, it corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two times before the shift is "1". ". Therefore, thereafter, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before the previous time, the base value stored in the base value data 203o two times before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

When the total out number counter 203j becomes 60,000 and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the real-time base value data 203l is also initialized to 0 as the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0. It is initialized to 0 including the valid data flag. Then, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is kept at 0 until the total out number counter 203j becomes 300 again, and when the total out number counter 203j becomes 300, the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is maintained. 1 is stored in the flag. After that, 1 is held in the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000.

Here, since the real-time base value measured while the total number of outs is small is greatly affected by the game content at that time, even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, which adversely affects the judgment of fraudulent activity. May affect. Therefore, when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0, and when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment is the real-time base. While "bL." Indicating a value is lit, "---" is lit in the ratio segment. This makes it possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs. In this case, "bL." Indicating the real-time base value may be blinked in the identification seg, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed in the ratio seg. As a result, it can be shown that the currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs, and the real-time base value at that time can be notified as a reference.

On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401 by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, the identification segment is set to real time. While "bL." Showing the base value is lit, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as a valid base value in the ratio segment.

Returning to FIG. 39 (a), the new start-up flag 203p is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is used as a used stand and moved to another hall. 10 is a flag indicating that a new start-up period is in progress. When the new start-up flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the new start-up period.

The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to be turned on when the power is turned on while operating the RAM complete erase switch operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period. Is shown to be. Then, the new start-up flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j becomes 300, and when the total out number counter 203j is different by 300, the new start-up flag 203p is set to off. After that, the new rise flag 203p is kept off.

When the new rise flag 203p is on, the base display device 401 blinks (or lights up) “88.” in the above-mentioned special display mode, that is, the identification segment, and the real-time base value data 203l in the ratio segment. The real-time base value is displayed in such a manner that the stored real-time base value is blinked (or lit). In addition, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state by performing the display.

The display type counter 203q is a counter for determining the type of the base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203q is 0, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, and when the display type counter 203q is 1, the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, and the display type counter 203q. When the value is 2, the base display device 401 displays the base value two times before the previous time, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base display device 401 displays the base value two times before the previous time.

The display type counter 203q is set when the new start-up flag 203p is set to off, that is, when the total number of outs is 300 after the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the new start-up period ends. Is initialized to 0. Then, the display type counter 203q is counted up by 1 every 5 seconds, and when the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 at the time of counting up, it is returned to 0. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes in the order of real-time base value, previous base value, previous two times base value, and previous two times base value every 5 seconds, and the previous two times base value is displayed. After that, the display returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value is repeated while switching every 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. Here, the start-up process will be described focusing on the differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. As described above, where the same processing as the startup processing of the first embodiment is executed, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, when it is determined by the processing of S604 that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on (S604: Yes), and when it is determined by the processing of S605 that the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S604: Yes). S605: No), when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value is not normal by the processing of S607 (S607: No), after the payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S614), the RAM 203 Of the used areas, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous base value data 203n, and the previous two times, which are information necessary for displaying the base value. The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new rise flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3001), and the initial value is set for the cleared RAM 203 area excluding the information necessary for displaying the base value (S3002). ..

As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before the operation is performed is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be made to. Further, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 can be displayed on the base display device 401. Then, even if the fraudster operates the RAM erase switch 122 to erase the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value is still retained, so that the evidence of fraud can be suppressed from being erased.

If it is determined by the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604), then it is determined whether or not the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003). Then, if the RAM total erase switch is not turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

On the other hand, if the RAM total erase switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004), and then the RAM 203 All initialization processing (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the full initialization process (S3005, S3006) of the RAM 203, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, and the previous two times base, which are information necessary for displaying the base value. The used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 including the value data 203n, the base value data 203o two times before, and the new rise flag 203p (S3005), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

As described above, the RAM complete erase switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine. When you do, it is designed to be operated. Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM full erase switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous time base value data 203n, and the previous time before. The base value data 203o and the new rise flag 203p can be initialized each time, and the measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. In addition, even when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, by making it possible to initialize (clear) this information, cheating is performed in the previous hall and the base value. Even if the information has changed, it is possible to prevent the suspicion that there was fraudulent activity at the next store by continuously displaying the information at the next store. Further, since the RAM complete erase switch is provided in the board box 100 which is connected so as not to be opened, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect this information.

When any of the processes of S609, S3002, and S3006 is executed, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are then turned on (S3007). In that state, the weight process is executed for 5 seconds (S3008). As a result, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are continuously lit for at least 5 seconds. ..

In the base display device 401, if some segments are not lit due to a failure such as disconnection, the base value or the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment may be made in determining the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 every time the power is turned on for at least 5 seconds, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be turned on normally and the base display. It can be easily determined whether or not the display of the device 401 is normally performed.

Further, the progress of the start-up process is waited for 5 seconds when this lighting is performed, and the start of the normal game process is awaited. As a result, when the base value cannot be displayed correctly on the base display device 401, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding without being able to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity, and if there was fraudulent activity. In that case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of some disadvantage to the player, the hall, or the like.

In this embodiment, every time the power is turned on, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on, and the game is stopped for 5 seconds so that the game does not proceed. However, while the lighting is being performed, the normal game processing may be started to advance the game. In this case, while measuring the real-time base value as the game progresses, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be made to stand by. As a result, even if all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are turned on when a momentary power failure occurs, the player can immediately play the game. Can be resumed.

In the start-up process, after the process of S3008, the process proceeds to the process of S613.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value processing is a combination processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) that is periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 shown in the third embodiment. It is executed as one process of (S2002), and calculates (measures) the base value and displays the base value.

In this base value processing, first, the base value calculation process is executed (S3101), the real-time base value is calculated (measured), and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000, each base value data is between 203l and 203o. Shift processing etc. is executed. The details of this base value calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, it is determined whether or not 1 second has elapsed since the last time the base value display process (S3103) was executed (S3102), and it is determined that 1 second has passed since the last time the base value display process (S3103) was executed. If this is the case (S3102: Yes), the base value display process is executed (S3103), and the process of displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is executed. The details of the base value display process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

When the processing of S3103 is completed, the base value processing is terminated. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3102, if it is determined that one second has not elapsed since the previous execution of the base value display processing (S3103) (S3102: No), the base value display processing (S3103) is skipped. And end the base value processing. As a result, the base value display process (S3103) is executed at 1-second intervals, and the display of the base display device 401 is driven and controlled every 1 second.

In the determination process of S3102, if the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the power of the main control device 110 is turned on (that is, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed), the base is previously executed. It does not determine whether or not one second has elapsed since the value display process (S3103) was executed, and affirmative determination (S3102: Yes) is made as it is, and the base value display process (S3103) is executed. As a result, the drive control process of the base display device 401 can be executed immediately after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the above-mentioned base value calculation process (S3101), which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process.

In the base value calculation process (S3101), first, at least the outputs of the first start port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the out switch 208g are read, and the first starting port is read. It is determined whether or not the 64a, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b have won a prize, and the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharge path, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved (S3201). ). It should be noted that the winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharge path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a, 208c, 208d, and 208g.

Next, it is determined whether or not the out switch 208 g is on (S3201), and if it is determined that the out switch 208 g is on and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: Yes), the total out 1 is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). As a result, the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of launched balls), is counted by the total number of outs counter 203j.

If it is determined that the out switch 208g is not on and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path after the processing of S3203 or by the processing of S3201 (S3201: No), then the gaming state is a big hit. Instead, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state and the time is not shortened, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the normal time (S3204). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the jackpot time, the low probability state and the time saving state, that is, the gaming state is the normal time (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

That is, in the processing of S3205, it is determined that there is a prize among the first starting opening 64a, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b based on the winning detection information saved by the processing of S3201. If there is a winning slot, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning slot (that is, the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit time, the high probability (probability change) time, and the normal time excluding the time saving time is counted by the low probability payout number counter 203k.

When it is determined that the gaming state is a big hit, a high probability (probability change), or a short time, that is, the gaming state is not the normal time after the processing of S3205 or by the processing of S3204 (S3204: No), then the real-time base value is calculated by the above equation (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). By this processing, the measurement of the base value is performed in real time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of outs counter 203j is 60,000, that is, whether or not the total number of outs has reached 60,000 (S3207). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 60,000 (S3207: No), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S3211. On the other hand, when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 (S3207: Yes), the processes of S3208 to S3210 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S3211.

In the processing of S3208, first, the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is shifted to the base value data 203o two times before the previous time, the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, and then the real-time base value data 203l is transferred to the previous time. The base value data is shifted to 203 m (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. Further, each base value previously displayed as the previous base value and the previous two times base value is subsequently displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous two times base value and the previous two times base value.

Each base value may be stored in a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In this case, in the process of S3208, the address (ring buffer pointer) for storing the real-time base value may be updated. However, when the base value is stored in the FIFO method ring buffer, once the ring buffer pointer is damaged due to some influence such as noise, the base value may be correctly stored in the RAM 203 and may not be displayed. be. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the area of RAM 203 for storing the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time is fixed, and every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. By shifting the data between them, the above problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO method ring buffer can be avoided.

Further, in the processing of S3208, these shift processings are executed by one LDIR instruction. The LDIR instruction enables block transfer of data only by setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, the data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), (HL) and (DE) are both added by 1, and (BC) is subtracted by 1. Then, this is repeated until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, the base value data 203o two times before the previous time is stored in the address (AA) (AA is one address of the RAM 203), the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is stored in the address (AA + 1), and the previous base value data 203m is stored in the address (AA + 2). ), The real-time base value data 203l is stored in the address (AA + 3), the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred is set as (AA), and the transfer destination address is set as (AA + 1). The shift process of S3208 can be easily realized only by setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 bytes and executing one LDIR instruction.

In the subsequent processing of S3209, the base value and the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, the base value is newly measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, while the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set until the total number of outs reaches 300. It is kept at 0. While the total number of outs is small, the real-time base value measured is greatly affected by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, which may adversely affect the judgment of fraudulent activity. be. Therefore, when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0, and when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment is the real-time base. While "bL." Indicating a value is lit, "---" is lit in the ratio segment. This makes it possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs.

In the subsequent processing of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). As a result, the total number of outs is counted again by the total number of outs counter 203j until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

In the process of S3211, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, that is, whether or not the total out number reaches 300 (S3211). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the processes of S3212 to S3215 are skipped, and the base value calculation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the total number of outs reaches 300 (S3211: Yes), the process of S3212 to S3215 is executed, and then the base value calculation process is terminated.

In the process of S3212, it is determined whether or not the new rise flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, when the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period because the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch. .. Then, as a result of the previous processing of S3211, the total number of outs has reached 300, and since it is the timing to end the new start-up period, the new start-up flag 203p is set to off (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). As a result, thereafter, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value are switched and displayed on the base display device 401 every 5 seconds.

If it is determined that the new rise flag 203p is off after the processing of S3214 or by the processing of S3212 (S3212: No), then 1 is set to the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. The flag. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1, so that when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment is set to 1. While "bL." Showing the real-time base value is lit, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as a valid base value in the ratio segment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, details of the above-mentioned base value display process (S3103), which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 and executed at 1-second intervals. Will be explained. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation process (S3103).

First, with reference to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether or not the new rise flag 203p is on (S3301). When the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period because the power is turned on while operating the RAM complete erase switch. Therefore, the base display device control circuit 402 is displayed so that "88." Is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment of the base display device 401 and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is blinked (or lit) in the ratio segment. A control signal is transmitted to (S3302). Then, the base value display process is terminated.

As described above, in the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, in the shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, a ball may be manually inserted into each winning opening and the winning ball may be paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights up) "88." In the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed. By displaying in a special display mode that blinks (or lights up) in the ratio segment, which is different from the normal base value display, it indicates that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value (valid base value). Can be done. In addition, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state by performing the display.

On the other hand, when the new start-up flag 203p is off as a result of the processing of S3302 (S3301: No), it is then determined whether 5 seconds have elapsed since the display type counter was updated or initialized (S3301). As a result, when 5 seconds have elapsed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the process proceeds to the process of S3305 shown in FIG. 44. On the other hand, if 5 seconds have not elapsed as a result of the processing of S3303 (S3303: No), the processing of S3304 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3305 shown in FIG. 44.

In updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, if the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. If the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the types of base values displayed on the base display device 401 are real-time base value, previous base value, previous two times base value, previous two times base value, and real-time base value. , Last time base value, ... is switched every 5 seconds.

With reference to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of the display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). When the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: “0”), it is a period during which the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), "bL. Is lit and displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for a total number of outs of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 as the base value is valid. Is set to. Therefore, the real-time base value measured as a valid base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, when the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 as a result of the processing of S3306 (S3306: No), "bL." Is lit and displayed in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and "bL." Is displayed in the ratio segment. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to lightly display "---" (S3308).

As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, it is assumed that the base value is not valid and the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l. The flag is set to 0. This makes it possible to indicate that a currently valid real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs.

If the display type counter 203q is 1 as a result of the processing of S3305 (S3305: "1"), it is a period during which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is set to "b1. Is lit and displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the previous base value data 203m is lit and displayed on the ratio segment (S3310). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

Further, when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 and the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the previous time after the shift. The valid data flag of the base value data 203m is also set to "1". Therefore, after the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time after the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it is stored in the previous base value data 203 m. The base value will be displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3309, when the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), "b1." Is lit and displayed in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the ratio segment is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is lit (S3311). As a result, when a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, it can be indicated by "---" displayed in the ratio segment that a valid previous base value has not been obtained.

As a result of the processing of S3305, when the display type counter 203q is 2 (S3305: “2”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is 1 (S3312) two times before, and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3312: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is set to "b2. Is lit and displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the base value data 203n is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the pre-previous base value data 203n, the valid pre-previous base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

Also, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the previous base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch). After all the initialization of the RAM 203 is executed, it corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the shift is set to "1". Therefore, thereafter, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before the previous time, the base value stored in the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3312, when the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous time is 0 (S3312: No), "b2." Is lit and displayed in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the ratio segment is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is lit (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the pre-previous base value, it can be indicated by "---" displayed in the ratio segment that a valid pre-previous base value is not obtained.

As a result of the processing of S3305, when the display type counter 203q is 3 (S3305: “3”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is 1 two times before (S3315), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is used. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." Is lit and displayed and the base value of the base value data 203o is lit and displayed on the ratio segment two times before (S3316). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data 203o two times before the previous time, the valid base value two times before the previous time can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

Further, when shifting the base value data 203n two times before the previous time to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the previous time is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch). After it is turned on and all initialization of RAM 203 is executed, it corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two times before the shift is "1". ". Therefore, thereafter, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before the previous time, the base value stored in the base value data 203o two times before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value. Become.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3315, when the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is 0 two times before (S3315: No), "b2." Is lit and displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3317). As a result, if a valid base value has not been obtained two times before, the "---" displayed in the ratio segment indicates that a valid base value two times before last has not been obtained. Can be shown.

When any of the processes of S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 is completed, the base value display process is terminated as shown in FIG. 43.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 has a real-time base value (hereinafter referred to as “real-time”) measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000. (Referred to as "base value"), the previous (referred to as the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000) last time (referred to as the previous base value), and the total number of outs 10000 (two times before) before the previous time. The base value before the previous time measured when the number of pieces is reached and the base value before the previous time measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 one before the previous time (two times before the previous time) are It is displayed by switching at regular intervals. By displaying the base values for the past multiple times (previous base value, previous two times base value, previous two times base value) in addition to the real-time base value, it becomes possible to more accurately judge whether or not there was fraudulent activity. In addition, the time when the fraudulent activity occurred can be predicted to some extent.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Is lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be normally lit, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the base display device 401 is normally performed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a new pachinko machine 10 such as when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at a manufacturing factory or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine. At the time of startup, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. .. In the new launch of the pachinko machine 10, in the shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, a ball may be manually inserted into each winning opening and the winning ball may be paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. In addition, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state by performing the display.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 58. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is set in advance by the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol are set by the hall personnel and the like. 2 The winning probability of the symbol could not be changed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is set in a plurality of stages (in this embodiment, the set values "1" to "6"). It is configured so that it can be changed to (6 stages). Then, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment may change the set value of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol (hereinafter referred to as "probability set value") (hereinafter referred to as "setting change mode"). When confirming the probability set value (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation mode"), the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to display a history of errors (hereinafter referred to as “error history”) that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10 on the base display device 401.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments. The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the base display device 401 is arranged on the main board constituting the main control device 110, and as shown in FIG. 45, the base display is performed when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed. It is assembled so that the display screen of the device 401 can be seen. The base display device 401 displays the base value in the normal state, while the probability setting value is displayed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, the base display device 401 is configured to be able to display an error history.

Further, on the main board constituting the main control device 110, the setting key 501 used when changing the set probability setting value or confirming the set probability setting value, and the base display device 401 are displayed. An error display button 502 used when displaying an error history is provided. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided so as to project from the main board through the holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by a person related to the hall or the like without opening the board box 100.

Here, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46A is a front view of the setting key 501 showing the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, and FIG. 46B is the setting key 501 showing the case where the setting key 501 is in the on state. It is a front view of. The setting key 501 is inserted between the two positions of the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON" by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, and turned on when it is located on the warm side.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine corresponds to the states of the RAM erasing switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch (not shown). Determine the start-up mode of the machine 10. The door opening switch is a switch that detects that the inner frame 12 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened).

FIG. 47 shows a start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, a RAM erase switch 122 at power-on of the pachinko machine 10 for starting up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode, a setting key 501, and a door open switch ( It is a figure which showed each state of (not shown).

The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with four modes: a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a start-up mode other than these RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode, and when the power off occurrence information is not stored in RAM 203 or when the data stored in RAM 203 is corrupted. Except for, this mode is for executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203 to restart the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off.

Then, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Further, when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that the door opening switch is on. .. Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on condition that the door opening switch is on.

In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the hall personnel and the like can use the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select whether to use the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode not related to the probability set value, or the normal mode.

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the inner frame 12 is unlocked and released and the setting key 501 is turned on, the hall personnel and the like can turn on the RAM erasing switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to select whether to use the setting change mode related to the probability setting value or the setting confirmation mode.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a start-up mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a start-up mode related to the probability set value can be selected. Then, when the startup mode is set to be irrelevant to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. , When the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is set, it is possible to select whether to set the start-up mode to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in the game is changed. Therefore, if the game state before the power is turned off is taken over and the game is continued, the pachinko machine 10 However, there is a risk that the predetermined gaming performance cannot be exhibited. Therefore, when the probability set value is changed in the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, since the setting confirmation mode is a start-up mode that only confirms the probability set value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that the game can be continued by taking over the game state before the power is turned off. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the data of the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and released, and then the RAM is erased while the setting key 501 is turned on. When the switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the data of the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and set. It was decided to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off while the key 501 was turned on.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. Then, when starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode or the setting change mode for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing (while turning on) the RAM erase button 122. That is, if the hall personnel and the like understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is required for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started up from now on.

Further, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability set value to search for the pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of jackpot and / or having a high probability of hitting, or to arbitrarily change the probability set value to a high probability. Further, since the RAM erasing switch 122 is usually provided at a position that is not easily touched by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability in that respect as well.

Further, there are two switches and the like that should be operated at the same time even when they are started up in the setting operation mode, and they can be sufficiently operated with both hands, so that the operability is good. From the above, the hall personnel and the like can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by properly using the ON / OFF of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the door opening switch is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, the inner frame 14 is opened. It is a condition.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for the hall personnel and the like to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because 14 needs to be open. Therefore, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 14 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, the setting key 501 is not started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Similar to the case of the off state, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode, and if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode. As a result, even though the inner frame 14 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the machine starts up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the game is played on the pachinko machine 10. It can be suppressed that it is not started. Further, in order to open the inner frame 14, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player arbitrarily opens the inner frame 14, confirms the probability setting value, searches for the pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of jackpot probability and / or the probability of winning, or arbitrarily changes the probability setting value to a high probability. It is possible to suppress such things.

When starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is not always a condition that the door opening switch is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, the inner frame 14 is opened. It does not have to be. That is, when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting change mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not. You may start it with. If the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting confirmation mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not. You may start it.

By the way, this pachinko machine 10 has prepared a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or confirming the probability setting value as one of the start-up modes, but in the present embodiment, the probability setting value is changed and confirmed. Is enabled only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up (when the power is turned on) by this setting confirmation mode, and the probability set value cannot be confirmed while the game is in progress. This is due to the following reasons.

That is, the display of the accessory ratio such as the display of the base value by the base display device 401, the display related to the accessory ratio, etc., and the display of the value indicating the game performance, the game state, etc. make it possible to detect fraudulent acts at an early stage. Therefore, in principle, it must be displayed during the game. Therefore, at least the probability set value cannot be displayed while the player is playing the game.

If the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at a time other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started, it may be during the game by the player. For example, it is possible to stop the game. However, although the fluctuation time can be stopped by stopping the game in the main control device 110, the fluctuation effect may be continuously performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the main control device 110 and the main control device 110 Inconsistency may occur between the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at a time other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is in the middle of the game being played by the player. However, it is conceivable to continue the game as it is so that the probability set value can be confirmed by the base display device 401, but it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 in order to confirm the display of the base display device 401. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the player to continue the game.

Further, after the setting key 501 is turned on, it is conceivable to wait for the completion of all the variation effects including the jackpot and the reserved portion, and then display the probability setting value on the base display device 401. However, many of the fluctuation effects have a long fluctuation time, and some of them continue for about 5 minutes. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to be long in the normal state, and it takes a lot of time for all of these holds to be exhausted, so it is difficult to wait until the probability set value is displayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to change or confirm the probability setting value, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. As a result, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401 in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game, and the probability set value can be reliably changed or confirmed by a person involved in the hall or the like. Further, once the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the state before the power is turned off is backed up in the RAM 203, and the startup process is performed without clearing the backed up state. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

Further, by limiting the change or confirmation of the probability set value at the time of starting up the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily confirming or changing the probability set value at normal times.

FIG. 48A is a diagram showing the roles of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. Further, FIG. 48B is a diagram showing the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIG. 48A, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. Further, when the setting key is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is fixed as the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, "1" to "6" can be set as the probability setting value, and the jackpot random number value and / or the second for each probability setting value ("1" to "6"). The winning random value of the symbol is stored in ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot random value and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each probability set value determines the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in the probability set value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the higher the jackpot probability and /. Alternatively, a jackpot random number value and / or a hit random number value of the second symbol is set for each probability setting value so that the hit probability of the second symbol is high.

The jackpot random number value and / or the hit random number value of the second symbol is fixed, and the range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value ("1" to "6") and / Alternatively, the range of random numbers generated for performing the winning lottery of the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 202 in advance. The jackpot random number range and / or the hit random number range of the second symbol defined for each probability set value determines the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability in the probability set value.

In the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. However, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is "6", the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to "1". To. That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops while adding the range of "1" to "6" by one.

Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is fixed as the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Then, after the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 subsequently performs game control with the determined probability set value, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 48B, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the base value is replaced with the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the display contents of the probability setting value to be displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49 (a) is an example thereof.

In the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off, and only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side is used. The probability set value (1 to 6) is displayed.

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification seg includes characters (bL., B1, ..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed on the ratio seg. ) Is displayed, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), all the segments of the identification segment are turned off in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information provided is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and 7 on the left side. Since all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, you can see that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment are turned off. Therefore, it is possible to clearly inform the hall personnel and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value.

FIG. 49B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401. Turn off the other segments. That is, "---" is displayed on the identification segment. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, even in the left 7-segment display 401c, only the segment of the horizontal bar in the middle is turned on and the other segments are turned off. That is, "-" is also displayed in the relevant segment. Then, the probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment.

Even with this, the display state of the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed and the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, at first glance, the base display device can be used. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability set value. Further, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and "-" is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to clearly grasp the people involved in the hall.

FIG. 49 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (c-2) shows the display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of contents. In this example, the display contents are changed also in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, the identification segment turns off all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, as in FIG. 49 (a). On the other hand, the ratio seg displays "H" indicating the setting change mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display 401c among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio seg. , The probability set value (1 to 6) is displayed on the 7-segment display 401d on the right side.

Even with this, the display state of the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed and the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, at first glance, the base display device can be used. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability set value.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and 49 (c-2), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability is set using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. The value is displayed, and on the left 7-segment display 401c, "H" is displayed in the setting change mode and "C" is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment displays "H" or "C" different from the number, so that the base display device 401 is displayed. It is possible to clearly understand that the information displayed in is a probability set value for the hall personnel and the like.

In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is clearly shown whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is currently used. be able to.

FIG. 49 (d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (d-2) shows the display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of contents. Also in this example, as in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and 49 (c-2), the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, as in FIG. 49B, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, only the segment of the horizontal bar in the middle is turned on and the other segments are turned off. That is, "---" is displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, in the ratio seg, the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio seg set the setting change mode in the left 7-segment display 401c as in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2). "H" indicating "H" or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and the probability setting value (1 to 6) is displayed on the 7-segment display 401d on the right side.

Even with this, the display state of the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed and the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, at first glance, the base display device can be used. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability set value. Further, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment displays "H" or "C" different from the number, so that the base display device 401 displays. It is possible to clearly understand that the displayed information is the probability set value for the hall personnel and the like. In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is clearly shown whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is currently used. be able to.

FIG. 49 (e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (e-2) shows the display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of contents. In this example as well, the display content is changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the display content is changed by the identification segment, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and 49 (c-2). It is different from the example and the examples of FIGS. 49 (d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "SH." Is displayed in the setting change mode and "SC." Is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off, and only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side is used to display the probability set value (1 to 6).

As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1, ..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed on the ratio segment are displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), "SH." Is displayed indicating the setting change mode in the setting change mode, and "SC." Is displayed indicating the setting confirmation mode in the setting confirmation mode. .. In this way, as the display content displayed on the identification segment, the display content is different between the case where the base value is displayed and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, so that the two can be clearly differentiated. Therefore, at first glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, by displaying different display contents on the identification segment between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is currently used.

Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment, while in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment is displayed. Since the probability setting value is displayed using only the 401d and all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the 7 segment on the left side of the ratio segment is turned off. Seeing that all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, it is clear to the hall personnel that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is at least a probability setting value, not a base value. It can be grasped.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying the error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 can display an error history, which is a history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10. The display of the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is being pressed. That is, unless the error display button 502 is pressed, the base value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401.

A fraudulent act of giving a shock to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet closer to change the direction of flow of the ball, causing the ball to win prizes in various winning openings, and intentionally obtaining a prize ball or performing a big hit lottery. There are cases where an act or a fraudulent act such as passing a ball through the through gate 67 to intentionally perform a winning lottery for a normal symbol may be performed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to detect an impact or detect the approach of a magnet, and when these are detected, the game is stopped as a serious error. At this time, the base display device 401 does not display the error history, but continues to display the base value.

Assuming that the base display device 401 is configured to display the error type when a serious error is detected, the base display device 401 is the one that has cheated so that the base value or the like is changed. In order to hide the base value displayed in, the pachinko machine 10 is intentionally shocked or the magnet is brought close to it to cause a serious error, and the error type is displayed on the base display device 401, and the base value is not displayed. It is conceivable to make it so.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, a person who commits a fraudulent act such that the base value or the like is changed by continuously displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is It is possible to hide the display of the base value after fraudulent activity, and it is possible to reliably detect fraudulent activity against the base value.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the pressing operation is performed. From this displayed error history, the hall personnel and the like can grasp what kind of error the error occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed again on the base display device 401.

The error history may display only the error type that occurred closest in time. Further, the error types of a maximum of a plurality of times (for example, four times) may be displayed retroactively from the error including the error that occurred closest in time. When displaying the error types for a maximum of a plurality of times, the base display device 401 displays the error types for a predetermined time in order from the one closest to the current time. If the error display button 502 is pressed when no error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (or no error record remains), an error occurs while the pressing operation is being performed. The display indicating that there is no record may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may be continuously displayed as it is.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 while the error display button 502 is being pressed, but the error is displayed when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. When the button 502 is pressed once, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the error display button 502 is pressed once while the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 displays the error history. It may be configured to redisplay the base value.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 50 (a) is an example thereof.

In the example shown in FIG. 50A, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that the error history is displayed is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, and the right 7-segment display is displayed. The error type is displayed numerically using only the device 401d. For example, if it is an impact detection error, "1" is displayed as an error type, and if it is a magnet detection error, "2" is displayed as an error type.

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification seg includes characters (bL., B1, ..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed on the ratio seg. ) Is displayed, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), all the segments of the identification segment are turned off in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information is a base value or an error history. Further, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50A, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and the probability setting value is displayed on the left side. Since "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c of the above, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. It is possible to clearly understand this to the people involved in the hall.

Further, even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are FIGS. 49 (a), 49 (c-1), and (c-2), the error history is used as the base. When displaying on the display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the error history are displayed. In some cases, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at first glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. can.

On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are FIG. 49 (b), FIGS. 49 (d-1), (d-2), FIG. 49 (e-1), (e-). In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability setting value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and it is displayed on the base display device 401 at first glance. It is possible to grasp whether the information is a probability setting value or an error history. Further, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. However, it is possible to clearly inform the hall personnel and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

FIG. 50B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. In the example shown in FIG. 50B, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401. And turn off the other segments. That is, "---" is displayed on the identification segment. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that the error history is displayed is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, and the right 7-segment display is displayed. Using only the device 401d, the error type is displayed numerically as in FIG. 50 (a).

Even with this, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed, so that the display state can be displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to grasp whether the information being stored is a base value or an error history. Further, when displaying the error history on the base display device 40, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Since "E" is displayed, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 can be seen by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to clearly understand that it is a probability set value for the people involved in the hall.

Further, even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are FIGS. 49 (b), 49 (d-1), and (d-2), the error history is used as the base. When displaying on the display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the error history are displayed. In some cases, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at first glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. can.

On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are FIG. 49 (a), FIGS. 49 (c-1), (c-2), FIGS. 49 (e-1), (e-). In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability setting value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and it is displayed on the base display device 401 at first glance. It is possible to grasp whether the information is a probability setting value or an error history. Further, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. However, it is possible to clearly inform the hall personnel and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

FIG. 50 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying the error type that has occurred closest in time as an error history, and FIG. 50 (c-2) is an error history. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display contents at the time of displaying the error type which occurred second in time. In the example of FIGS. 50 (c-1) and 50 (c-2), among the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "E" indicating the display of the error history on the left 7-segment display 401a. Is displayed, and on the 7-segment display 401b on the right side, a numerical value indicating the closest error type to be displayed is related to the error that occurred in time is displayed. That is, when the identification seg is displayed as "E1.", It indicates that the error type of the error that occurred closest in time is displayed, and when the identification seg is displayed as "E2.", It indicates that the error type is displayed. Indicates that the error type of the second closest error is displayed. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off, and only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side is used to display the error type.

In this way, the display contents displayed on the identification segment are clearly different depending on whether the base value is displayed, the probability setting value is displayed, or the error history is displayed. Can be differentiated. Therefore, at first glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a probability setting value, or an error history. In addition, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value indicating which error type is related to the error that occurred closest in time, the displayed error type is the closest in time. It can be clearly shown whether it is related to the error that occurred.

Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment, while when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the 7 segments on the right side of the ratio segment are displayed. Since the error type is displayed using only the display 401d and all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the left side of the ratio segment is left. Seeing that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c are turned off, it is possible to make the hall personnel clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value. can. Then, from the situation that the error display button 502 is pressed and not at the time of starting the pachinko machine 10, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history to the hall personnel and the like. Can be easily grasped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates that the base display device 401 displays the probability set value in the setting change mode (hereinafter referred to as “setting changing display”). The display mode shown and the display mode indicating that the probability setting value is displayed in the setting confirmation mode (hereinafter referred to as “setting confirmation display”) will be described.

First, FIG. 51 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. A plurality of LEDs 37a are provided as described above in the description of the first embodiment, and depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, a variable display may be performed, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery may be shown after the variable display, or a holding series may be displayed. I will show you. Further, the LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot when a jackpot occurs.

The pachinko machine 10 uses the round number notification LED 37a1 to light the round number notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from the notification of the maximum number of rounds, so that the setting change display is being performed or the setting is being confirmed. Notify that the display is being performed.

FIG. 51B shows a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 and a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 in the round number notification LED 37a1, and the setting is being changed. It is a figure which showed the lighting pattern at the time of notifying that it is a display, and the lighting pattern at the time of notifying that it is a setting confirmation display.

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2, is that the first round number notification LED is "off", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED. Is "off", the 4th round number notification LED is "off", the 5th round number notification LED is "on", the 6th round number notification LED is "on", and the 7th round number notification LED is "on". ..

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "on", and the third round number notification LED. Is "on", the 4th round number notification LED is "on", the 5th round number notification LED is "off", the 6th round number notification LED is "off", and the 7th round number notification LED is "off". ..

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting is being changed is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED is. "On", the 4th round number notification LED is "on", the 5th round number notification LED is "on", the 6th round number notification LED is "off", and the 7th round number notification LED is "on".

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting is being confirmed is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED is. "On", the 4th round number notification LED is "off", the 5th round number notification LED is "on", the 6th round number notification LED is "off", and the 7th round number notification LED is "on".

In this embodiment, the round number notification LED 37a1 is used not only to notify the maximum number of rounds at the time of a big hit, but also to display or confirm the setting by a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern used in those notifications. Although the case of notifying that the display is being performed has been described, the original use of an LED other than the round number notification LED37a1 such as an LED for notifying the jackpot symbol and an LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the entire LED37a is used. A lighting pattern that is not used in the notification may be used to notify that the setting being changed display or the setting being confirmed display is being performed. As a result, the first symbol display device 37 can be notified of the setting changing display or the setting confirming display only by software control without changing the hardware configuration of the first symbol display device 37.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Further, the point that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110 is also different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment.

The setting key 501 outputs a signal indicating whether it is in the off state or the on state to the main control device 110. The main control device 110 grasps the state of the setting key 501 in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, and is output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The contents of the RAM erasing signal SG2 and the signal output from the door open switch are grasped, and the start-up mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG. 47.

The error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating the presence / absence of a pressing operation to the main control device 110. The main control device 110 determines whether or not the error display button 502 has been pressed based on the signal output from the error display button 502, and causes the base display device 401 to display the error history while the error display button 502 is being pressed.

The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10.

When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 is given an impact to the pachinko machine 10 by an unauthorized person, and the flow direction of the ball is illegally changed. As a serious error, the launch control device 112 is instructed to stop firing the ball, and the main control device 110 is notified of the occurrence of the error. Output an error detection signal.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that the magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 has the magnet brought closer to the pachinko machine 10 by an unauthorized person, and the flow direction of the ball is changed illegally. In order to instruct the launch control device 112 to stop firing the ball and notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error as a serious error. Outputs the error detection signal of.

When the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 110, the main control device 110 stops the progress of the game. As a result, if there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. Further, the main control device 110 sets the error type (impact detection error or magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from the payout control device 110 to the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) of the RAM 203, which will be described later. ). When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In this outside work area 203y, at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are stored.

The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating the base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 39 (a). It is composed of 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, previous two times base value data 203n, previous two times base value data 203o, new start-up flag 203p, and the like.

The bonus data 203r is data necessary for calculating the bonus ratio and displaying the calculated bonus ratio on the base display device 401. For example, the start 1 counter 263a shown in FIG. , Start 2 counter 263b, normal 1 counter 263d, normal 2 counter 263e, big winning opening counter 263e, out counter 263f, bonus ratio data 264a, continuous bonus ratio data 264b or similar data. ..

The error data 203t is data indicating the error type of the error that occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

Here, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that occurred closest in time, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, when the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, only the latest error type is always stored in the base display device 401, and only the error type that occurs closest in time is displayed in the error history displayed on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes the error that occurred closest in time and displays the error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) retroactively from the error. , The error data 203t stores a plurality of times in order from the one closest to the current time.

For example, the error data 203t stores the error types for four times in order from the one closest to the current time in the error data 203t, so that the error data 203t stores the error types that occur closest in time. The first error type data to be stored, the second error type data to store the error type that occurred second closest in time, and the third error type to store the error type that occurred third closest in time. It has data and a fourth error type data that stores an error type that occurs fourth closest in time. Then, when the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the third error type data is shifted to the fourth error type data, the second error type data is shifted to the third error type data, and the third error type data is shifted. 1 The error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as the first error type data. As a result, the error data 203t stores the error types for four times in order from the one closest to the current time, and the base display device 401 includes the error that occurred closest in time. , The error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) are displayed retroactively from the error. Further, in this case, if the address of each error type data is assigned so that the shift processing of each error type data can be performed by one LDIR instruction, the shift processing can be performed by only one LDIR instruction. ..

When the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes the error that occurred closest in time and displays the error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) retroactively from the error. , The error data 203t may be configured by a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the error types for a plurality of times may be stored. In this case, when the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the address (ring buffer pointer) for storing the error type may be updated.

Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode, at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. do. As a result, even if the RAM erase button 203 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased, so that these are displayed on the base display device 401. Can be done. Therefore, even if the fraudster turns on the RAM erase button 203 in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, and the data of the RAM 203 is erased even when the probability setting value is changed, but the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are erased. Keep holding without doing. As a result, even if the fraudster changes the probability setting value in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed. On the other hand, the accessory ratio data 203s is erased in the data erasure of the RAM 203 performed after the probability set value is changed. This is because when the probability setting value is changed, the bonus ratio also changes, so if the bonus data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the bonus based on the changed probability setting value is left. This is because the product ratio cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is held, and the past base value and the information necessary for calculating the base value are held. By doing so, it is possible to detect fraudulent activities in the past without concealment.

In this way, when erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability set value has been changed, some of the data related to the display of the base display device 401 is retained without being erased, and the rest. By erasing the data of, the data can be retained or deleted according to the actual situation of each data.

Further, in the outside work area 203y1, the area to be erased by erasing the data of the RAM 203 after the probability set value has been changed and the area to be retained without being erased are divided, and the accessory ratio is divided into the area to be erased. The base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in the area for storing the data 203s and holding the data 203s without erasing the data 203s. As a result, the data including the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased can be easily erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability set value has been changed, and can be erased. It is possible to securely retain the data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the area to be retained by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, the initial value setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S4001). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the internal function register setting process is executed (S4002). In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) that mainly controls the game is executed with a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as "4 millisecond timer interrupt") generated every 4 milliseconds as an opportunity, and is a base. The base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content displayed on the display device 401 is executed triggered by a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as "2 millisecond timer interrupt") generated every 2 milliseconds. In the processing of S4002, for example, these 4 millisecond timer interrupts and 2 millisecond timer interrupts are permitted. Further, when the random number value required for performing the big hit lottery or the winning lottery is generated by the random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, the range of the random number value to be generated in the processing of S4002 (not shown). Maximum value) is set.

In particular, by allowing a 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the base display device 401 can display the probability setting value.

In the process of S4002, it is not always necessary to enable the 4-millisecond timer interrupt and set the range (maximum value) of the random number value. If the processing of S4002 does not allow the 4-millisecond timer interrupt or / or set the random value range (maximum value), the other standing described later that is executed at the stage of shifting from the startup processing to the main processing. In (S4013) of the raising process, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt that was not performed in the processing of S4002 may be permitted and / or the range (maximum value) of the random number value may be set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003), and if it is turned on (S4003: Yes), whether or not the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on. Is determined (S4004). When an affirmative judgment is made in the processing of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on. The startup mode is set to the setting change mode, and the setting change process is executed (S4005).

Here, the details of the setting change process (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming a change in the probability set value from a person involved in the hall or the like.

In this setting change process (S4005), first, the start of display of the probability set value in the base display device 401 is set (S4101). By the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode becomes the setting change mode, the display may be always started on the base display device 401 with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is an intermediate value of the probability setting value. It may be "4" or "6" which is the maximum value of the probability set value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the start-up mode is set to the setting change mode, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is 3 or more, the probability setting value is displayed as "3" on the base display device 401. If the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than 3, the display will start with the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. good. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where the probability setting value is to be slightly reduced (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the display of the probability set value is started with the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability set value is incremented by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and when the probability set value is "6" and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is changed to "6". It is done by returning to "1". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to make almost one round of the probability set value while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 122. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting the display of the probability setting value at "3", the probability setting is performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. You can update the value.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S4102), and if it is not within the predetermined range, that is, the probability setting value is abnormal (S4102). : No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability set values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is an intermediate value of the probability set values. It may be "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the processing of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the processing of S4103 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4104. ..

In the process of S4104, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. As will be described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is started without turning on the RAM erase switch 122, the probability setting value is broken and it is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"). If not, this setting change process is executed, but at this time, the setting key 501 is usually in the off state. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, the probability setting value is broken and the normal range ("1"). Even if this setting change process is executed because it is not within the range of "6"), if the setting key 501 is in the off state, a positive judgment is immediately made in this S4104 process, and the probability setting is as described later. The value is fixed and the setting change process ends. Therefore, the people involved in the hall cannot change the probability set value. On the other hand, if it is detected in the processing of S4104 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, and it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, a hole is formed. Unless the related parties perform an operation of turning the setting key 501 from the off state to the on state and then returning it to the off state, a positive judgment is not made in the processing of S4104. It can be changed.

When the pachinko machine 10 is started without turning on the RAM erase switch 122, the probability setting value is broken and set even if it is not within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"). If the change process is not executed (for example, if the hall personnel are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

If it is determined that the setting key is not in the off state as a result of the processing of S4104 (S4104: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value is set. Is updated (S4106), and the process returns to the process of S4102. As described above, when the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value to update the probability setting value, which is the process of S4106, and the probability setting up to that point is set. When the value is "6", it is performed by returning the probability setting value to "1". The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4104: No → S4105 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined by the processing of S4104 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4104: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the processing of S4104 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4013: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is used as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S4107). Then, the end of the display of the probability set value in the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is terminated. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value in the base display device 401 is terminated by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value. The display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description of the start-up process will be continued. When the setting change process of S4005 is completed, the setting change RAM clear process is then executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clear process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the established setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1) and the accessory ratio data 203s. And are deleted (cleared), while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are retained without being deleted. By erasing the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1), a new game is started using the newly set probability setting value. Can be done.

Further, as described above, when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the probability setting value after the change is left. It becomes impossible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on. By erasing the accessory ratio data 203s in the setting change RAM clear process, the accessory ratio can be correctly calculated based on the changed probability setting value.

On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, in order to hold the base value data 203r and calculate the past base value and the base value in the setting change RAM clear processing. By retaining the necessary information, past fraudulent activity can be discovered without concealment. In addition, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudster who caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history can be displayed. It cannot be erased, and it is possible to suppress the concealment of fraudulent activities.

After the process of S4006, another start-up process is executed (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in the processing of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the off state or the door open switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the off state, as shown in FIG. 47, the start-up mode is set to the RAM clear mode, and the normal RAM clear process is executed (S4007). Further, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the on state, if the door open switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 14 is closed), the start-up mode is set. The normal RAM clear process is executed as the RAM clear mode instead of the change mode (S4007). As a result, even though the inner frame 14 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from starting the game. can.

In the normal RAM clear processing (S4007), among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the establishment setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared). , The base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the establishment set value stored in the inner work area 203x1).

On the other hand, by holding the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing them, the RAM erase button 203 is turned on and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. However, these can be displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if the fraudster turns on the RAM erase button 203 in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, the fraudulent activity can be found from the base value, the accessory ratio, the error history, etc. displayed on the base display device 401. ..

After the process of S4007, another start-up process is executed (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4003 (S4003: No), then it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008), and the memory is stored. If it is not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally. Therefore, in this case as well, the process shifts to S4007 and the normal RAM clear process is executed (S4007). ..

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated, and whether or not the calculated RAM judgment value is normal, that is, the calculated RAM judgment value is saved when the power is cut off. It is determined whether or not it matches the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is also used for calculating the checksum value.

If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up RAM 203 data is destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") (S4010). Then, if the probability set value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007 and the normal RAM clear process is executed. Needless to say, the probability set value is not erased and continues to be held in the normal RAM clear process and the setting change RAM clear process.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, for example, "7" (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005, the setting change process shown in FIG. 55 is executed, and the hole is entered. Have the parties concerned set the probability setting value again. At this time, the third symbol display device may display a display prompting the change of the probability set value, or the voice output device 226 may output a notification sound or a voice to notify the effect. Further, the external terminal (not shown) provided in the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, it is possible to inform the people involved in the hall that it is necessary to reset the probability setting value.

As a result of the processing of S4009, if the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S4009: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door open switch is ON (S4011). When an affirmative judgment is made in the processing of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on. The startup mode is set to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4012).

Here, the details of the setting confirmation process (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401.

In this setting confirmation process (S4012), first, the start of display of the probability set value in the base display device 401 is set (S4201). By the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. By detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

If the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the processing of S4202 (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting key 501 is in the off state. During this period, the base display device 401 continues to display the probability set value. Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the end of the display of the probability set value in the base display device 401 is set (S4203), and the setting confirmation process is terminated. By the process of S4203, the display of the probability set value is terminated by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value. The display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

This setting confirmation process (S4012) is executed after it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is because when the RAM determination value is abnormal, the RAM clear processing should be executed before confirming the probability set value. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before the determination of whether or not the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal is performed. ..

Returning to FIG. 54, the description of the start-up process will be continued. When the setting confirmation process of S4012 is completed, other start-up processes are executed (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

When a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, and the setting key 501 is in the off state or the door open switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, as shown in FIG. 47, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, and the other stand-up of S4013 is performed. After executing the raising process, move to the main process. Further, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the door open switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 14 is closed) even if the setting key 501 is in the on state, the start-up mode is set. The normal mode is set instead of the confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, other start-up processes of S4013 are executed, and then the process proceeds to the main process. As a result, even though the inner frame 14 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from starting the game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the base display control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, this base display control process is a process for controlling the display content to be displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed triggered by a 2-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds.

In the base display control process, first, various setting processes for causing the base display device control circuit 402 to control the display of the base display device 401 are executed (S4301). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability setting value is being changed by the setting change mode (S4302), and if it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), the probability setting value being changed is set. The included setting change seg data is set as seg data (S4303), the seg data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process is terminated. As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1). To.

As a result of the processing of S4302, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed (S4302: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability setting value is being confirmed by the setting confirmation mode (S4304). As a result, if it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), the setting confirmation seg data including the probability setting value during the setting confirmation is set as the seg data (S4305), and the seg data is set as the base display device control circuit. It is output to 402 (S4309), and this base display control process is terminated. As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2). To.

As a result of the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the setting is not being confirmed (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the error history is being displayed based on the operation of pressing the error display button 502 (S4304: No). S4306). As a result, if it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history segment data including the error type is set as segment data (S4307), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402. (S4309), this base display control process is terminated. As a result, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes of FIGS. 50 (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2).

If it is determined that the error history is not being displayed as a result of the processing of S4306 (S4306: No), the seg data for normal games including the base value or the accessory ratio is set as the seg data (S4308), and the seg data is displayed as the base. It is output to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process is terminated. As a result, in the normal state, the base value or the accessory ratio is displayed on the base display device 401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that mainly controls the game, and is executed triggered by a 4-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4401). By determining whether the probability set value is within the normal range each time the timer interrupt process is executed, even if the probability set value is destroyed for some reason, it can be detected early. can do.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range as a result of the processing of S4401 (S4401: Yes), the normal game processing that mainly controls the game is executed (S4402), and then the calculation and base of the bonus ratio are performed. The timer interrupt process is terminated by executing the role ratio process (base process) that performs the process of managing the information related to the accessory ratio and the base value such as the calculation of the value (S4403).

In the game processing (S4402), for example, processing such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment is executed. That is, the main controls of the game include a lottery for big hits, setting of variable display, opening / closing control of the big winning opening (large opening opening) 65a at the time of big hits, and lottery for winning the second symbol display device 83. .. The MPU 201 uses the used area area 203x (inner work area 203x1 and inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4402. On the other hand, the MPU 201 uses the used area outside area 203y (outside work area 203y1 and outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4403.

At this time, in the processing of S4403, as described in the third embodiment, from the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x in the used area is performed, the bonus ratio and the base using the area 203y outside the used area. When shifting to the value-related processing, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually saved in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and the combination processing and the combination processing are performed. After executing the process related to the base process, when shifting (returning) from the process related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area to the game process that mainly controls the game using the area 203x inside the used area, the outside The registers 200 saved in the work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

Further, as described in the fourth embodiment, while executing the process of using the area 203x in the used area, the CALL instruction is used to execute the process related to the accessory ratio or the base value using the area 203y outside the used area. At the stage of reading, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio or the base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the processing for executing the processing related to the accessory ratio or the base value may be read by the CALL instruction. .. Then, at the stage of ending the process of using the area 203y outside the used area read by the CALL instruction and returning to the process of using the area 203x inside the used area, the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio are individually set. After clearing to 0, it may be possible to return to the winning combination processing (base processing).

On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the predetermined range as a result of the processing of S4401 (S4401: No), the process does not proceed to the game processing (S4402), the notification command is set (S4404), and the notification command is issued. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In response to this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a notification sound or voice from the voice output device 226 to urge the hall personnel and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability set value. Alternatively, a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a display urging a person related to the hall to be called is output to the display control device 114. Further, the external terminal (not shown) provided in the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the hall personnel and the like restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and perform a process of changing the probability setting value.

Further, following the process of S4404, the ball launch stop instruction is given to the payout control device 111 (S4405). This stops the firing of the ball. After the processing of S4405, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Then, while the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), even if the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, the game processing (S4402) is not executed, so that the game is played. It will be completely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of some disadvantage to the player by continuously performing the game in the state of the abnormal probability set value.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up is irrelevant to the probability setting value depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. You can select the mode and the startup mode related to the probability setting value. Then, when the startup mode is set to be irrelevant to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. , When the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is set, it is possible to select whether to set the start-up mode to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As a result, if the hall personnel and the like understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is required for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started up from now on. ..

In addition, the above-described effect can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the sixth embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, it is detected that the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM clear switch 122 and the setting key is turned off. In this case, the case where the probability setting value is fixed has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the setting change switch (not shown). , The probability setting value is determined by turning on the RAM clear switch 122.

Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change mode, and is the main board from the hole provided in the board box 100 like the error display button 502. It is provided so as to be more prominent, and can be operated by a person involved in the hall or the like without opening the board box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal by pressing and pressing the switch.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments. The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (S4005) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, as in the sixth embodiment, and accepts and confirms the change of the probability setting value from the hall related persons and the like. It is a process for.

In the setting change process according to the seventh embodiment, first, the same processes of S4101 to S4103 as in the sixth embodiment are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4111: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch is turned on (S4112).

As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), the sixth embodiment The probability set value is updated (S4106) in the same manner as in S4106 (see FIG. 55), and the process returns to the process of S4102. The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4111: No → S4112 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by the processing of S4111 (S4111: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the processing of S4111 that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is used as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S4107). When the probability set value is determined, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described above in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 to the hall related person or the like to determine the probability set value, it is possible to strongly recognize that the data in the RAM 203 is erased after that.

After the processing of S4107, it is nextly determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4113). In the process of S4113, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, and the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S4113, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4113: No), the processing of S4113 is repeatedly executed. Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value in the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change processing is performed. To finish. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value in the base display device 401 is terminated by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value. The display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

As described above, the above-described effect can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the seventh embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments, the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be updated, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be confirmed. Explained. Further, when the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined from the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode according to the operation state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power is turned on. explained.

Here, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the problem is what mode should be started when the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment solves such a problem. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the error of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as “RAM error”), the fact that the setting change process has been performed, and the fact that the setting confirmation process has been performed are halled through the external output terminal 503. Output to computer 600. Through the call computer 600, the people involved in the hall can grasp the RAM abnormality that occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the fact that the setting change process or the setting confirmation was performed, and the like.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the sixth and eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to seventh embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to seventh embodiments. The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is that the external output terminal 503 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The external output terminal 503 is configured so that the hall computer 600 can be connected. The external output terminal 503 is provided so as to project from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and by connecting a wiring connector (not shown) connected to the hall computer 600 to the external connection terminal 503. The signal or data output from the main control device 110 is relayed to the hall computer 600 to the hall computer 600.

FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the work area 203x1, the probability setting value data 203x11, the change probability setting value data 203c12, the setting changing flag 203x13, the setting confirmation flag 203x14, the RAM error flag 203x15, and the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 are located. At least stored.

The probability set value data 203x11 is data indicating the (determined) probability set value set in the pachinko machine 10. Also in the present embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, "1" to "6" can be set as the probability setting values, and the respective probability setting values ("1" to "6") are set. On the other hand, the jackpot random value and / or the winning random value of the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot random value and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each probability set value determines the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in the probability set value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the higher the jackpot probability and /. Alternatively, a jackpot random number value and / or a winning random number value of the second symbol is set for each probability setting value so that the winning probability of the second symbol is high.

In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value determined by the hall personnel and the like is the probability setting value data 203x11. Stored in. The pachinko machine 10 sets a jackpot random number value and / or a winning random number value of the second symbol corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 based on the ROM 202, and sets a jackpot lottery or a winning lottery of the second symbol. To execute.

The jackpot random number value and / or the hit random number value of the second symbol is fixed, and the range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value ("1" to "6") and / Alternatively, the range of random numbers generated for performing the winning lottery of the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 202 in advance. The jackpot random number range and / or the hit random number range of the second symbol defined for each probability set value determines the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability in the probability set value. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a range of random numbers generated for performing a jackpot lottery corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 and / or a random number generated for performing a hit lottery for the second symbol. A range is set to generate a random number for performing a big hit lottery and / or a random number for performing a winning lottery for the second symbol.

The update probability setting value data 203x12 is the probability that the probability set value will be updated by the hall personnel or the like before the probability setting value is confirmed in the setting change process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is data showing a set value. That is, while the above-mentioned probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating a confirmed probability setting value, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated by a hall-related person or the like before confirmation in the setting change process. It becomes the data which shows the probability setting value to be updated.

Specifically, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the fixed setting value data 203x11 is first saved as the update probability setting value data 203x12. That is, the probability setting value so far is set in the probability setting value data 203x12 for update, and starting from the probability setting value so far, the hall related persons and the like are made to update the probability setting value. Then, every time the RAM erase switch 122 that also serves as a switch for updating the probability setting value is turned on, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is added by 1, and the update probability setting value data 203x12 is “6”. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to “1”. Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is saved as the probability setting value data 203x11, and the probability setting value updated by the hall related person or the like is used in the future game. It is fixed as a probability setting value.

Here, in the setting change process, the probability setting value is not updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, but the probability setting value is updated using the update probability setting value data 203x12 for the following reason. .. That is, when the probability setting value is updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change process, the probability setting value used for the game until then is deleted by the update. Will be done. Therefore, even if you turn on the power again, start up the pachinko machine 10, and try to change the probability setting value from the beginning, the probability setting value used for the game up to that point is gone, so you can do it. It disappears. In this case, the probability setting value saved in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power is turned off, that is, the setting change process can be restarted from the probability setting value in the middle of setting change, but the undetermined probability setting value is saved. There is a risk of giving the illusion of to those involved in the hall.

Further, depending on the relationship between the timing when the hall related person or the like turns on the RAM erase switch 122 and the timing when the power is turned off, an event may occur in which the probability set value data 203x11 is not updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. obtain. In that case, since the probability setting value that the hall-related person thinks to have been updated and the probability setting value saved by the pachinko machine 10 are different from each other, the hall-related person or the like may feel distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the probability setting value is updated in the setting change processing, the probability setting value is updated using the update probability setting value data 203x12, so that the probability setting value data is being changed during the setting processing change. The probability setting value that has been used so far can be left in 203x11. As a result, even if the power is turned off during the setting change process, the probability setting value used in the previous game remaining as the probability setting value data 203x11 is updated in the setting change process to be executed again. By saving as the probability set value data 203x12, the probability set value can be updated from the beginning again. Therefore, the people involved in the hall can redo the update of the probability setting with confidence.

The setting changing flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting changing process is being executed. The setting updating flag 203x13 indicates that the setting change process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting change process is not being executed when it is off. The setting changing flag 203x13 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to ON. When the updated probability setting value is confirmed in the setting change processing and the execution of the setting change processing is completed, the setting changing flag 203x13 is turned off.

By the way, if the setting changing flag 203x13 is on in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. That is, it indicates that the power was turned off during the update of the probability set value by the setting change process. Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, a start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a start-up mode set corresponding to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the normal mode.

After the power was turned off during the setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the startup operation of turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 off and turning on the power was performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the RAM clear mode.

After the power is turned off during the setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the startup operation of turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erase switch 122 to turn on the power. If so, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode according to the start-up operation. In this case as well, the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from scratch) and executed.

After the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the start-up operation of turning on the power with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. If so, instead of starting up in the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning).

In this way, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not only the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, but also other start-up operations. Even if it is a raising operation, it becomes a setting change mode in which the setting change process is re-executed from the beginning. As a result, if the power is turned off during the setting change, the hall-related persons and the like can always be made to change the probability setting value from the beginning when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to make sure that the hall-related person or the like changes the probability set value and confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is turned off during the setting change, the people involved in the hall can surely update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be used with confidence. The probability setting value for 10 can be changed.

Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), instead of continuing from the updated probability setting value when the power was turned off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability setting value (probability setting value data 233x11) used in the previous games can be used to update the probability setting value from the beginning. Therefore, the people involved in the hall can redo the update of the probability setting with confidence.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting confirmation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is being executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as the start-up mode. be. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting confirmation process is not being executed when it is off. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to on, and when the execution of the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned off.

By the way, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. It indicates that the power was turned off during the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation process. Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62 again, a start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the normal mode. As a result, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up by operating the normal mode after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can confirm that the probability set value is not destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind.

After the power was turned off during the setting confirmation, the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the startup operation of turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 off and turning on the power was performed. In that case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person involved in the hall. The fact that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the hall personnel and the like at least clearly want to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intentions of the people involved in the hall and the like.

After the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the start-up operation of turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned on, is performed. Even if this is the case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like clearly wants to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the people involved in the hall.

After the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the start-up operation of turning on the power with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. Even if this is the case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like clearly wants to confirm the probability set value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning), the start-up process can be performed according to the intention of the people involved in the hall.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, such as the data stored in the RAM 203 being destroyed. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203 when it is on, and indicates that there is no abnormality in the RAM 203 when it is off.

The RAM error flag 203x15 is normally set to off. Then, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, the RAM 203 does not have the information on the occurrence of the power failure that should have been saved at the time of the previous power failure, or the RAM of the RAM 203. If the determination value (checksum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range (“1” to “6”), it is assumed that the RAM 203 has an abnormality and the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is set to ON.

When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, the RAM abnormality is notified to prompt the restart in the setting change mode, and the hall computer 600 is notified via the external output terminal 503. The MPU 201 of the control device 110 is put into an infinite loop state. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted in the setting change mode, the probability set value can be reliably reset, and the RAM 203 can be cleared so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Can be directed to.

The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the RAM erasing switch 122 is used to determine the startup mode when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is set. It is also used when updating. That is, the probability set value is updated every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

At this time, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the probability set value is updated. The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether or not the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. That is, when the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Then, after making that determination, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to "1" before determining whether or not the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is first changed from the off state to the on state after the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode. Set to "on". This is still a RAM erase switch as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the stage where it is first determined whether or not the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. While 122 may remain on, if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, so turn it off. It may be erroneously determined that the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the probability set value has been turned on, and the probability set value may be updated. As a result, the people involved in the hall and the like feel distrust because the probability set value is updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on to update the probability set value.

On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is once set before determining whether or not the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. By setting it to "ON", even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of this first judgment, the probability is set. It is possible to prevent the probability set value from being updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the value has been turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, the initial value setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S4201). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the internal function register setting process is executed (S4202). Also in this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, a 2-millisecond timer interrupt that generates a base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401 every 2 milliseconds is generated. Execute as an opportunity. In the process of S4202, for example, the 2-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, when the random number value required for performing the big hit lottery or the winning lottery is generated by the random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, the range of the random number value to be generated in the processing of S4202 (not shown). Maximum value) is set. Further, in the process of S4202, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the process of S4202, the main control device 110 makes various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In particular, by allowing a 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the base display device 401 can display the probability setting value.

In the process of S4202, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of the random number value. When the range (maximum value) of the random number value is not set in the process of S4202, in the other start-up process (S4221) described later, which is executed at the stage of shifting from the start-up process to the main process. The range (maximum value) of the random number value that was not performed in the process of S4202 may be set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored (S4203: Yes), it means that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff is normally completed. Next, the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off (S4204). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 203. In this embodiment, the case where the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the checksum value calculation will be described, but the probability set value may be included in the checksum value calculation.

If, as a result of the processing of S4204, it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off (S4204), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the data used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that (information) is normally held, it is then determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4205). Here, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4205 is performed in order to reliably detect such an abnormality of the probability set value.

Then, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag 203x13 is on (S4206). When the setting changing flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), the setting change process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, the power was supplied during the update of the probability setting value by the setting change process. Indicates that was turned down. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S4213, and the setting change process is executed (S4213).

As a result, in the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation is not only the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, but also other start-up operations. Even if it is an operation, it is possible to set the setting change mode in which the setting change process is re-executed from the beginning. Therefore, if the power is turned off during the setting change, the hall-related persons and the like can always be made to change the probability setting value from the beginning when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to make sure that the hall-related person or the like changes the probability set value and confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is turned off during the setting change, the people involved in the hall can surely update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be used with confidence. The probability setting value for 10 can be changed.

Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), instead of continuing from the updated probability setting value when the power was turned off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability setting value (probability setting value data 233x11) used in the previous games can be used to update the probability setting value from the beginning. Therefore, the people involved in the hall can redo the update of the probability setting with confidence. The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

On the other hand, if the setting changing flag 203x13 is turned on as a result of the processing of S4206 (S4206: No), it means that the setting change processing was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. As a process for confirming the start-up operation when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by a person concerned or the like, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on (S4207). In the process of S4207, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process described later is not executed. Therefore, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed by the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Instead of making a judgment using the read one, the input / output port 205 is directly accessed and the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read.

If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off as a result of the processing of S4207 (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state in order to further confirm the startup operation (S4207: No). S4208). In the present embodiment, only the case of determining whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state will be described. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door is opened. You may determine if the switch is on.

As a result of the processing of S4208, when the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4208: N0), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state. It means that you have operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209). As a result, when the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209: Yes), the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, the probability setting value is confirmed by the setting confirmation process. Indicates that the power was turned off during. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the head (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set established setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. As a result, the established setting value can be confirmed.

In this way, even when a person involved in the hall performs a start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, instead of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, the setting confirmation process is performed from the head ( Start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode to be executed again (from the beginning). As a result, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up by operating the normal mode after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can confirm that the probability set value is not destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is off as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: No), it means that the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. .. Further, the process of S4209 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4206 that the setting changing flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process is performed when the power is turned off last time. Even if it wasn't running.

Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the hall personnel and the like in the start-up operation, the setting confirmation process of S4210 and the process of S4211 described later are skipped, and other start-up processes are executed. Later (S4214), the process shifts to the main process. As another start-up process, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the present embodiment, as in the sixth or seventh embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed triggered by the 4-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds. .. By permitting a 4-millisecond timer interrupt in the processing of S4214, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

Further, in the main process of the present embodiment, only the update process of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the update process of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the update process of the variation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 in FIG. 17) are executed during the loop. Execute infinite loop processing. A power failure monitoring process executed in the main process in the first embodiment or the like (a process of monitoring whether or not there is power outage occurrence information and executing a process related to the power outage when there is power outage occurrence information, FIG. 17). The processes of S701 and S704 to S707) are executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the ON state as a result of the processing of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. Means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the processing of S4208 is executed when it is determined in the processing of S4206 that the setting changing flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), that is, the setting change processing is performed when the power is turned off last time. Is not running. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode started up by a person concerned with the hall or the like. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4210, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set established setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. As a result, the established setting value can be confirmed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

When the setting confirmation process (S4210) is completed, the external output process is executed (S4211). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the established setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, the people involved in the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is executed on the pachinko machine 10 and the established setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the established setting value is displayed illegally, it can be grasped as soon as possible. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by a person involved in the hall or the like ( S4207: Yes), and further, in order to confirm the start-up operation, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212). In the present embodiment, only the case of determining whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state will be described. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door is opened. You may determine if the switch is on.

As a result of the processing of S4212, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is ON and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It means that it was raised. When the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, that is, whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time. Regardless of this, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode.

Therefore, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state as a result of the processing of S4212 (S4212: Yes), the setting change processing is executed (S4213). By the setting change process, the established setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall or the like, the established setting value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. , The updated probability setting value is fixed as the probability setting value to be used for the future game, and the RAM clear process is performed. As a result, after changing the established setting value, a new gaming machine can be started with the changed established setting value. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on means that the person concerned with the hall is involved. Etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the people involved in the hall.

When the setting change process (S4213) is completed, the external output process is executed (S4214). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or that the established setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, the people involved in the hall can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 has executed the setting change process and the established setting value has been changed. Therefore, when the established setting value is changed illegally, it can be grasped as soon as possible. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on. (S4215). Here, the processing of S4207 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), the processing of S4212 determines that the setting key is in the off state (S4212: No), and the processing of S4215 is executed. If this is done, the RAM error flag 203x15 is always off, so that it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the processing of S4215 (S4215: No).

Further, in this case, since it is determined that the setting changing flag 203x13 is off in the processing of S4206 (S4206: No), the setting change processing is not being executed when the power is turned off last time. be. Therefore, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on by the processing of S4207 (S4207: Yes), the setting key is determined to be in the off state by the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), and the RAM is abnormal by the processing of S4215. If it is determined that there is no such option (S4215: No), it means that the hall personnel and others have started up in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. As shown in 62, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time. Therefore, the RAM clear process is executed (S4216).

In this RAM clearing process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the established setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), while the data is erased (cleared). The accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 are retained without being erased. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the establishment setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the establishment setting value data 203x11 is retained, so that the game can be continued with the establishment setting value determined before the RAM clear processing is executed.

Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, there was no RAM abnormality and the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode was performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person involved in the hall. The fact that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the hall personnel and the like at least clearly want to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, the start-up process can be performed according to the intentions of the people involved in the hall, etc. When the RAM clear process of S4216 is completed, other start-up processes are executed. Then (S4221), the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S4203 that the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4203: No), the RAM determination value calculated by the processing of S4204 is the RAM determination value saved at the time of power interruption. Either when they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4204: No), or when it is determined by the processing of S4205 that the probability set value is not within the normal range (S4205: No). When is applicable, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217), and then the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in order to confirm the startup operation of the hall personnel and the like. It is determined whether or not it is (S4218). In the process of S4218 as well as the process of S4207, the input / output port 205 is directly accessed and the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read.

If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4218 (S4218: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S4212 described above, and whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state is further determined. Judgment (S4212). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), it means that the person concerned with the hall or the like has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4212: Yes), in order to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode according to the start-up operation of the hall personnel and the like, the machine shifts to S4213 and the above-mentioned setting change process is executed.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after resetting the established setting value. Therefore, the game can be newly started with the newly set normal establishment setting value. By clearing this RAM, the RAM error flag 203x15 is turned off. Therefore, thereafter, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4218 (S4218: No), and even if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4218, the S4212 If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), the hall related person or the like is in the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, or the setting confirmation mode in the RAM abnormality. It means that the startup operation was performed in one of the startup modes.

In this case, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4215 process, and it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal in the S4215 process (S4215: Yes), and the process proceeds to the S4219 process. In the process of S4219, the RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4219). In this RAM error setting process, a process for notifying a RAM error is executed. For example, a voice lamp is used to give a notification prompting the pachinko machine 10 to be started up in the setting change mode by turning off the power once by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 and / or displaying the display on the third symbol display device 81. A command is sent to the control device 113.

Then, an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4220), another start-up process is executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process. do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, the hall personnel and the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred even if they do not notice the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

Here, although details will be described later, when the RAM error flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of a RAM error, the timer interrupt process does not execute the main control related to the game except for the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process. And. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters an infinite loop state because the main control related to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process after the transition to the main process. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode after the hall personnel and the like are made to grasp the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting process of S4219 and the external output process of S4220, and the probability setting value is surely set. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to operate normally.

As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the hall personnel and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key always intervenes to solve the RAM abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the Hall side from eliminating the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the setting change process (S4213), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63), will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming a change in the probability set value from a person involved in the hall or the like.

In this setting change process, first, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By permitting the 4-millisecond timer interrupt, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed triggered by the occurrence of the 4-millisecond timer interrupt. The details will be described later, but when the power failure monitoring process is executed in this timer interrupt process and the power is turned off during the setting change process, the power failure monitoring process holds the state at that time in the RAM 203. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely turned off.

Next, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and the initial setting required at the start of the setting change is performed (S4303). In the process of S4303, for example, an initial value is set in the RAM area used in this setting change process. The RAM error flag 203x15 may be cleared (off setting) accompanying the execution of the setting change process when the RAM is abnormal, either by the process of S4303 or by the RAM clear process (S4313) described later. good. As described above, when the RAM is abnormal, the hall personnel and the like are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Therefore, it can be shown that the RAM abnormality has been resolved by clearing (off setting) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 with the execution of the setting change process.

Next, the probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting value that has been used so far is read and saved as the update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The update of the probability set value is not performed for the probability set value data 203x11, but is performed using the update probability set value data 203x12. The update probability setting value data 203x12 is displayed on the base display device 401. The display mode at this time may be any one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). The ON setting of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 may be executed in the process of S4303. ON to the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 either from the time when the setting change process is executed until the process of S4309 described later (the process of determining whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on) is executed for the first time. All you have to do is set it.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4306), and it is not within the normal range, that is, abnormal. If it is a probability set value (S4306: No), the update probability set value data 203x12 is changed to an initial value (S4307), and the process proceeds to S4308. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability set values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is an intermediate value of the probability set values. It may be "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, even if the probability setting value data 203x11 is destroyed due to a RAM abnormality or the update probability setting value data 203x12 is destroyed during the update of the probability setting value, the update probability setting value data 203x12 By saving the probability setting value in the normal range as, it is possible to update the probability setting value in the normal range.

On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S4306 that the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the range of "1" to "6" (S4306: Yes), the processing of S4307 Is skipped and the process proceeds to S4308.

In the process of S4308, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4308). In the process of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

This is because, as described above, when the power is turned off during the setting change process, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode, which is started by the start operation in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started. This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning). In the processing of S4308, when it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off only by looking at the fact that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine is operated by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode. When 10 is started and the execution of the setting change process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the off state from the beginning, a positive judgment is immediately made in the process of S4308, and the probability setting value cannot be updated. , There arises a problem that the probability setting value is fixed as described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), the setting key 501 is turned off. By making a determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 has been turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation of the normal mode or the RAM clear mode and the setting change process is executed after the power is turned off during the setting change process, the setting key 501 is temporarily turned on. Since the probability setting value can be determined only by turning it off after the state is set, it is possible to avoid the problem that the probability setting value cannot be updated and the probability setting value is determined.

When it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the processing of S4308 (S4308: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the probability set value is updated.

As described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when starting up the pachinko machine 10, and also updates the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is also used when doing so. That is, the probability set value is updated every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Therefore, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on as a result of the processing of S4309 (S4309: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the process returns to the processing of S4306. In the process of S4010, specifically, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is added and updated by 1, and when the update probability setting value data 203x12 is “6”, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is “1”. Update to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4309 (S4309: No), the processing of S4310 is skipped and the process returns to the processing of S4306.

As described above, in the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Specifically, refer to the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the probability setting RAM erase switch 122 and the output of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 read by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 66) described later. Then, when the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Then, after making that determination, in the process of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, as described above, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “on” after the execution of the setting change processing is started and before the processing of S4309 is first performed by the processing of S4305 or the like. This is because there is a possibility that the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the stage of executing the process of S4309 for the first time. If the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, so that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to update the probability setting value. There is a risk of erroneously determining that there was a problem and updating the probability setting value. As a result, the people involved in the hall and the like feel distrust because the probability set value is updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on to update the probability set value.

On the other hand, after the execution of the setting change processing is started and before the processing of S4309 is first performed, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is once set to "on", so that the pachinko machine is used at the time of this first judgment. Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up 10 in the setting change mode, it is mistaken that the RAM erase switch 122 was turned on to update the probability setting value. It is possible to suppress the update of the probability set value.

The loop processing of S4306 to S4310 continues to be executed until it is determined by the processing of S4308 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4308: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the process of S4308 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is saved as the final setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the probability setting value updated by the hall related persons and the like is determined as the probability setting value to be used in the future game.

Next, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is disabled (S4312), and the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped. Then, the RAM clear process is executed (S4313), and the setting change process is terminated.

In the process of S4313, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the establishment setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), and the data is also erased (cleared). While deleting the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the establishment setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, since the establishment setting value data 203x11 is retained, the game can be played with the confirmed establishment setting value.

Further, by this RAM clear processing, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to off. Therefore, if the power is not turned off during the setting change process, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on. Will remain. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting changing flag 203x13 is on, it can be determined that the setting changing process was being executed when the power was turned off last time.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes, so if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the accessory based on the changed probability setting value remains. The ratio cannot be calculated correctly. By erasing the accessory ratio data 203s in the setting change RAM clear process, the accessory ratio can be correctly calculated based on the changed probability setting value.

On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, in order to hold the base value data 203r and calculate the past base value and the base value in the setting change RAM clear processing. By retaining the necessary information, past fraudulent activity can be discovered without concealment. In addition, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudster who caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history can be displayed. It cannot be erased, and it is possible to suppress the concealment of fraudulent activities.

When the setting change process is completed, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is finished, and the display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the setting confirmation process (S4210), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 63), will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the currently set established setting value on the base display device 401.

In this setting confirmation process, first, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted as in the process of S4301 of the setting change process (S4401). By permitting the 4-millisecond timer interrupt, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed triggered by the occurrence of the 4-millisecond timer interrupt. The details will be described later, but when the power failure monitoring process is executed in this timer interrupt process and the power is turned off during the setting change process, the power failure monitoring process holds the state at that time in the RAM 203. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely turned off.

Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), and is shown in, for example, FIG. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), or (e-2). In the display mode, when the display of the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 is started on the base display device 401, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

This is because, as described above, when the power is turned off during the setting confirmation process, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode in which the setting key 501 is started by the start operation in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started. This is because the setting confirmation process is configured to be executed from the beginning (from the beginning). In the process of S4403, when it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off only by looking at the fact that the level of the setting key 501 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the off state from the beginning, a positive judgment is immediately made by the process of S4403, and the confirmation of the probability setting value is completed in an instant. The problem arises.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), the setting key 501 is turned off. By making a determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 has been turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode and the setting confirmation process is executed after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting key 501 should be turned on once. Since the confirmation of the probability set value can be completed only by turning it off, it is possible to avoid the problem that the confirmation of the probability set value is completed in an instant.

If the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the processing of S4403 (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting key 501 is in the off state. During this period, the base display device 401 continues to display the probability set value. Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is finished, and the display of the base value is started on the base display device 401. Clear the flag 203x14 off (S4404). As a result, if the power is not turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set. Stays on. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, it can be determined that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time.

Then, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is disabled (S4405), the execution of the timer interrupt processing is stopped, and the setting confirmation processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that mainly controls the game, and is executed triggered by a 4-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a random number update process used for a big hit lottery or a second symbol hit lottery is executed (S4501), and then a power failure monitoring process is executed (S4502). In the power outage monitoring process, a process of monitoring whether or not there is power outage occurrence information and executing a process related to the power outage when there is a power outage occurrence information (process corresponding to S701 and S704 to S707 in FIG. 17). ) Is executed.

Next, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503). As a result, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and it is determined that no RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: No), the processes S4504 to S4515 are executed as normal game processes.

That is, the test firing test information setting process for setting the test firing test information is executed (S4504), and then the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the solenoid 209, and the base display device control circuit 402 connected to the input / output port 205 are executed. , The port output process for outputting the output signal set in the previous timer interrupt process to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol hold lamp 84, the external output terminal 503, etc. Execute (S4505).

Next, the states of various sensors, switches 208, and the like are read (S4506). The state of the RAM clear switch 122 is also read by the process of S4506. Next, a subtraction process of various timers used for controlling the game is executed (S4507), and then a process of detecting fraudulent activity by an impact, a magnet, or the like is executed based on an error signal from the payout control device 111 (S4507). S4508).

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the ball by the ball launch unit 112a is executed (S4509), and then a payout command for notifying the number of balls paid out by the payout control device 111 is issued to the payout control device 111. The payout command reception process to be received is executed (S4510), and then the payout command transmission process for instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out the ball is executed (S4511).

Next, the variable display of the first symbol (third symbol, special symbol) and the special symbol / special electric control process related to the jackpot are executed (S4512), and then the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) and the normal symbol / hit are executed. The general electric control process is executed (S4513). Then, the display LED data setting process of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol table device 38, the second symbol hold lamp 84, etc. is executed (S4514), and the whole computer 600 is executed via the external output terminal 503. The external signal setting process for setting the external signal to be output is executed (S4515), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on as a result of the processing of S4503 and it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: Yes), the processing of S4504 to S4515, which is the normal game processing, is skipped. , Ends the timer interrupt process as it is.

As described above, when the RAM error flag 203x15 is turned on by detecting the occurrence of the RAM abnormality by the start-up process of FIG. 63, the timer interrupt process is mainly related to the game except for the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process. Control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters an infinite loop state because the main control related to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process after the transition to the main process. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode after the hall-related persons and the like are made to grasp the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting process of S4219 and the external output process of S4220 of the start-up process, and the probability is set. By surely resetting the value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to operate normally.

As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the hall personnel and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key always intervenes to solve the RAM abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the Hall side from eliminating the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, in the timer interrupt process, the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process are executed even if a RAM error has occurred. By executing the random number update process, random numbers can be continuously generated while the power is turned on. Further, by executing the power failure monitoring process, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, the occurrence of a power failure can be monitored, and when a power failure occurs, the corresponding process can be reliably executed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in a situation where a RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change process is executed in the start-up process. If the power is turned off while the setting change process is being executed, the setting change flag 203x13 is held in the RAM 203 with the setting change flag 203x13 turned on. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started next time, the pachinko machine 10 is started. Regardless of the startup operation, the setting change process can be redone from the beginning.

As described above, the above-described effect can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the eighth embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to seventh embodiments, the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may be added to the embodiment or exchanged with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging the parts or a plurality of parts thereof. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300 has been described, but instead of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, or the combination. In addition to the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, information indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10, for example, the base value, the number of balls sucked for 100 hit balls (= 100-base value), and the jackpot. The average number of outs and the like may be calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 to count the number of winning balls for each winning opening has been described, but the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 is used for each winning opening. , You may count the number of balls paid out by winning. Then, in the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, the winning combination is based on the number of balls paid out by winning for each winning slot counted by the first reading memory 263. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the second embodiment, when it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, and when it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, the prize is won for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by the user may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In this case, when the number of winning balls is stored in the buffer 262 for 0.5 seconds for each winning opening, the CPU 261 corresponds to the number of winning balls for each winning opening. Multiply the number of prize balls in the winning opening to calculate the number of balls paid out by winning the prize in 0.5 seconds, and calculate the calculated number of paid out balls in the first reading memory 263. By adding to the counter of the winning openings, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. Further, when it is detected that a prize has been won in one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the winning opening in which the winning opening was made in the buffer 262, and in the CPU 261, the winning prize in which the buffer 262 has been won. When the information indicating the mouth is written, the number of balls paid out by winning the prize in the prize opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, so that the winning opening can be used for each winning opening. You may count the number of balls paid out by winning. Further, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the winning opening for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time), and stores the number in the buffer 262. , CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the number of balls written to the buffer 262 and paid out by winning the winning opening to the winning opening in 0.5 seconds is first. By adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. Further, when it is detected that a prize has been won in one winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by the winning in the area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262. When the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 is paid out written to the buffer 262 to the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening in which the number of the paid out balls is stored. By adding the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. In this way, even if the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 is configured to count the number of balls paid out by winning each winning opening, the counting is paid out by winning each winning opening. Since the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated from the number of balls, the fraudulent activity can be detected by analyzing the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. When the number of balls paid out by winning is stored in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201, it is not necessary to transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the bonus ratio management chip 207, and the buffer 262 is used. The bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated from the number of balls paid out by winning a prize in each winning slot stored in. Further, in order to calculate the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio by the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out by winning, which is counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. .. In this case, the inspection device 300 can calculate the gate ratio and the continuous bonus ratio without transmitting the contents of the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300.

In the first embodiment, the case where the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but only the accessory ratio data 264a is described. It may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300, or only the continuous accessory ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. You may do it. The inspection device 300 can analyze fraudulent activity by analyzing the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio transmitted from the bonus ratio management chip 207.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first read memory 263 is configured by the volatile memory has been described, but the first read memory 263 is configured by the non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.). May be done. Further, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 even while the power supply is turned off. In this case, in the process of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when the power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the initialization of the first reading memory 263 may be non-executed. As a result, the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be continuously held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the bonus ratio management chip 207 is turned off, even if the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is not executed, the latest second reading memory 264 is before the power is turned off. The prize ratio, etc. is calculated without leaking the prizes to each prize opening that was in the period when it was judged that the power was turned off from the timing (trigger) when the recording was made, and the total number of the prizes was read in the second reading. It can be recorded in the memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be unnecessary.

In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed and the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is output. In addition, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) for recording in the second reading memory 264, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 are The information is not used for the calculation, or is not recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can be made to perform the analysis using the latest information.

Further, in the first embodiment, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. However, by also transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the total number of balls won in each winning opening, which is the total number of winning balls, is the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus, although it is short-term information. The raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the latest bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning slot transmitted from the first reading memory 263 using the prize ball number table 202e. And can be analyzed. It should be noted that the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated here were awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing shown in the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. ..

Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and the calculated accessory ratio is calculated. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the fraudulent activity by using the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio output from the bonus ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 can perform a deep analysis using the latest information related to the winning. In this case as well, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 can perform a deeper analysis while referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

In each of the above embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a volatile first reading memory 263 and a non-volatile second reading memory 264 are provided, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. Until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached, the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 while accumulating, and when the timing is reached, the first reading memory is stored. Based on the information stored in 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 by the timing. A case of recording various kinds of information in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a non-volatile memory provided with at least a first reading area that plays the role of the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area that plays the role of the second reading memory 264. Is provided, and the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily accumulated in the first reading area until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. When the timing is reached, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading area based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area. Various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area may be recorded in the second reading area by the time when the timing is reached. As a result, the number of parts of the memory can be reduced, so that the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, in the MPU 201, the number of balls won for each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path is counted. Then, the number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the information on the game state at that time are transmitted to the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. With respect to the number of balls won for each winning opening set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the game state each time the setting is made in the buffer 262. The case where the information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches, the winning of the first start port 64a was detected by the output of the first start port switch 208a. In that case, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, the starting 2 buffer 262b is turned on and the first normal winning port switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the winning is detected. When the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on and guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f. When a sphere is detected, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i are turned on according to the game state at that time, and then the interrupt signal is transmitted. It may be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, in the setting information reception process executed by receiving the interrupt signal, the accessory ratio management chip 207 increments the start 1 counter 263a by 1 when the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and the start 2 buffer 262b If it is turned on, the start 2 counter 263b is incremented by 1, if the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, the normal 1 counter 263c is incremented by 1, and if the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on, the normal 1 buffer 263c is incremented by 1. Count up the counter 263d by 1, count up the big winning slot buffer 263e by 1 when the big winning slot buffer 262e is turned on, and count up the out counter 263f by 1 when the out buffer 262f is turned on. If the jackpot buffer 262g is on, the jackpot information is added and stored in the jackpot data 263g together with the time at that time, and if the opening buffer 262h is on, the door is opened to the opening data 263h. Medium information is added and stored together with the time at that time, and when the error buffer 262i is on, the error information is added and stored in the error data 263i together with the time and set. When the time when the information reception process is executed is in the midnight time zone, the overtime information may be added to the overtime data 263j together with the time at that time and stored. As a result, it is not necessary for the MPU 201 to count the number of balls that have won in each winning opening or the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 increases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, most of the processing power of the MPU 201 can be allocated to the main control of the game that should be originally performed by the MPU 201.

Further, in this case, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the large winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are managed by the accessory ratio. It may be input directly to the chip 207. Then, on the accessory ratio management chip 207, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the large winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are used. From each output of, the presence or absence of winning to the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the starting port with the prize are counted up by 1 and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path. If this is the case, the out counter 263f may be configured to count up by one. As a result, when there is a prize in the winning opening or when the ball is guided to the ball discharge path, the situation can be immediately reflected in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and based on the output of the door release switch 208g, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open. When the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the door opening information is added to the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC266 at that time and stored. The management chip 207 may be configured. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

In each of the above embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning opening before the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is set. Counting is performed by the counters 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263, and the number of balls discharged to the ball discharge path by the timing (trigger) is counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. Although the case has been described, the first reading memory 263 has a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, a normal 1 buffer 262c, a normal 2 buffer 262d, and a large winning opening buffer 262e, which are set from the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , Each value of the outbuffer 262d (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening that won in 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds). It may be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by RTC266 at that time. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263. It was calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that won a prize in each winning opening by that timing was calculated for each winning, and was discharged to the ball discharge path by that timing. The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also in this case, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is determined from the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300 whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. can do. Then, in this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each winning opening that wins in 0.5 seconds. The number of balls per ball, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of those balls (that is, the number of the balls is the first reading memory). It may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time when it is stored in 263). As a result, information such as how many balls won a prize in which winning opening at what time in an extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, and how many balls won at what time in an extremely short time of 0.5 seconds. The inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether or not the ball was guided to the ball discharge path (that is, whether or not the ball was launched into the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. The latest bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio can be calculated and analyzed using the prize ball number table 202e. It should be noted that the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated here were awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing shown in the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. ..

In addition, the number of balls for each winning opening that won a prize in the first reading memory 263 in 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and theirs. When storing the time associated with the number of spheres (that is, the time when the number of spheres is stored in the first reading memory 263), it is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the timing (trigger) is reached, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, in the inspection device 300, the number of balls for each winning opening recorded in the second reading memory 264 in 0.5 seconds, and to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds. The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of balls are transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is transmitted to the inspection device 300. You may do it. As a result, in the inspection device 300, the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is calculated from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds, and then the prize ball number table is used. By calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in each predetermined section using 202e, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be analyzed from the change in the prize ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio that are suspected of fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 has the number of balls for each winning opening that won a prize within 0.5 seconds, and 0. Since detailed information related to the game such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 5 seconds and the time associated with the number of balls is input, the role is based on this information. It is possible to investigate the cause of the change in the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in detail.

Further, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the start 1 buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the normal 1 buffer 262c, the normal 2 buffer 262d, the large winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer are set from the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262d (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening that won in 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds) is shown by RTC266. It may be recorded directly in the second reading memory 264 in sequence with the time at that time. In this case, the information regarding the game state set in the jackpot middle buffer 262 g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds is also the game state of the second reading memory 264 together with the time indicated by the RTC266. It may be recorded in the data 264d, and if the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the overtime information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the game state data 264d. It may be recorded in. As a result, the first reading memory 263 can be eliminated, so that the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

Further, in the MPU 201, when the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches. Turns on the start 1 buffer 262a, turns on the start 2 buffer 262b when a winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and by the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the ordinary 2 is used. When the buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on and the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is released. When detected, when the out buffer 262f is configured to be turned on, the first read memory 263 has a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, and a normal 1 buffer set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. Each value of 262c, normal 2 buffer 262d, large winning opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262d (that is, information indicating whether or not there was a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, and guidance to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds. Information indicating the presence or absence of a sphere) may be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by RTC266 at that time. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are based on each value stored in the first reading memory 263. The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening by the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path by that timing. The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also in this case, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is determined from the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300 whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. can do. Then, in this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is determined. Information indicating, information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). It may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time). As a result, information such as which winning opening was won at what time at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at what time the ball was guided to the ball discharge path at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (that is, a game). The inspection device 300 will be able to grasp detailed information such as (whether it was launched into the area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

Further, in the MPU 201, when the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches. Turns on the start 1 buffer 262a, turns on the start 2 buffer 262b when a winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and by the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the ordinary 2 is used. When the buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on and the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is released. If the out buffer 262f is configured to be turned on when it is detected, the first reading memory 263 has an turned-on buffer among the buffers 262a to 262e corresponding to each winning opening. The information indicating the winning opening where the prize was won, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball discharge path is the time indicated by RTC266 and the time at that time. It may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263. The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening by the time is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path by that timing. The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also in this case, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is determined from the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300 whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. can do. Then, in this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is determined. Information indicating, information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). It may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time). As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp information such as which winning opening was won at what time and at what time the ball was guided to the ball discharge path (that is, whether it was launched into the game area). It will be like. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating the presence or absence of winning balls for each winning opening every 2 milliseconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. Then, the latest winning combination ratio and the continuous winning combination ratio can be calculated and analyzed using the prize ball number table 202e. It should be noted that the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated here were awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing shown in the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. ..

In addition, the first reading memory 263 corresponds to information indicating the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and such information. When the attached time (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. At that time, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 contains information recorded in the second reading memory 264 indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds. The information indicating the above and the time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of winning balls for each winning opening every 2 milliseconds, and then the winning balls. By calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in each predetermined section using the number table 202e, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be analyzed from the changes in the prize ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio that are suspected of fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 is provided with information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, and a ball for 2 milliseconds. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the discharge path and the time associated with the information is input, the accessory ratio and the continuous combination are based on this information. It is possible to investigate the cause of the change in the product ratio in detail.

In addition, the information indicating the winning opening where the prize was won, the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and the time associated with the information (that is,) in the first reading memory 263. When the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), the first timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 includes information recorded in the second reading memory 264 indicating the winning opening where the prize was won, information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and information thereof. The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating the winning openings that have won a prize, and then uses the prize ball number table 202e to calculate each of the winning balls. By calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the predetermined section, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be analyzed from the changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of bonuses suspected of fraudulent activity and the ratio of continuous bonuses, the inspection device 300 has information indicating the winning opening where the prize was won and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating that the information and the time associated with the information are input, the cause of the change in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be determined based on this information. You can search in detail.

Further, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the start 1 buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the normal 1 buffer 262c, the normal 2 buffer 262d, the large winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262d are set from the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. Each value of (that is, information indicating the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening and information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) is the time at that time indicated by RTC266. In combination with this, the data may be sequentially recorded directly in the second reading memory 264. In this case, the information regarding the game state set in the jackpot middle buffer 262 g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds is also the game state data of the second reading memory 264 together with the time indicated by the RTC266. It may be recorded in 264d, and if the setting from MPU201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the overtime information is combined with the time indicated by RTC266 in the game state data 264d. You may try to record it. As a result, the first reading memory 263 can be eliminated, so that the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, an area in which information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of launched balls 264c, and the game state data 264d). The checksum value in the area where is recorded, in the second embodiment, the area where the launch ball number data 264c, the game state data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e are recorded) is calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264. When the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the checksum value may also be transmitted. Then, when the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the checksum value is calculated from the received information and compared with the checksum value transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207. , If they match, it may be determined that the received information is correct and the analysis may be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inspection device 300 from performing the analysis based on erroneous information.

In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the CPU 261 executes the inspection result output process based on the interrupt signal to manage the accessory ratio. The case where the information recorded by the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on a command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. The information recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300. As a result, if the inspection device 300 is in a state where the information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be received and then a command is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 can serve. Information transmitted from the object ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

In each of the above embodiments, when the accessory ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the winning information storage process (second embodiment) is being executed by the CPU 261, the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and is interrupted. When an interrupt signal is generated, while the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is made to wait, and the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information is executed. The execution of the inspection result output may be started after the saving process is completed. As a result, the inspection result output process is executed during the execution of the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and strange information is transmitted to the inspection device 300 because it is being written to the second reading memory 264. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the winning information or the like is transmitted from the MPU 201 to the bonus ratio management chip 207 in one direction in the main control device 110 has been described. However, the information output from the bonus ratio management chip 207 by the MPU 201 has been described. And some processing may be executed based on the information. For example, when the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped, or when some error occurs in the processing by the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Then, based on the information, the MPU 201 may notify the fact by display on the first symbol display device 37, lighting / blinking of the lamp, output by voice, display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. You may control it. As a result, the person concerned with the hall can know the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and can take some measures. Further, the MPU 201 is based on information indicating that the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped and information indicating that some error has occurred in the processing by the accessory ratio management chip 207. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be reset. As a result, the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the bonus ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko machine The MPU 201 may be controlled so that the machine 10 performs the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the continuous bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the continuous bonus ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. , The MPU 201 may be controlled so that the pachinko machine 10 performs a second predetermined notification. Further, also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is appropriately calculated from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, and is transmitted to the MPU 201. Therefore, the MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received from the bonus ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or the 7-segment display 37b may display a predetermined number. Further, as a first predetermined notification or a second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to turn on or blink the predetermined lamp by a predetermined method or output a predetermined voice. Alternatively, a command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to display a predetermined symbol or character on the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device 113 from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command. Further commands may be sent to 114. Further, as a first predetermined notification or a second predetermined notification, the hall computer provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed via a relay board (not shown) has a first predetermined accessory ratio. Information indicating that the ratio is higher than the ratio, or information indicating that the continuous bonus ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these notifications, the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10's bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio can be directly notified from the pachinko machine 10 to the people involved in the hall. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the pachinko machine 10 may have been cheated. In addition, such notification can lead to deterrence of fraudulent activities.

In each of the above embodiments, the bonus ratio management chip 207 determines whether or not the calculated bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio. The determination result may be output to MPU201. Then, the MPU 201 may be controlled to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 itself may execute a control for performing a first predetermined notification or a second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, the LEDs that perform these notifications are connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the accessory ratio management chip 207 performs a first predetermined notification or a second predetermined notification, these LEDs are driven and controlled. You may. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color, or the 7-segment display 37b may display a predetermined number. Further, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the command is transmitted in the voice lamp control device 113. Based on the above, it may be controlled to turn on / blink a predetermined lamp, output a predetermined voice, or perform a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the information indicating that the bonus ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or the continuous bonus ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio, directly from the bonus ratio management chip 207 to the hall computer. Information indicating that may be transmitted. Also by this, the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10's bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio can be directly notified from the pachinko machine 10 to the people involved in the hall. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the pachinko machine 10 may have been cheated. In addition, such notification can lead to deterrence of fraudulent activities.

In the second embodiment, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a are also used. The case where the information of the number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is given to the MPU 201 when the inspection device 300 is output to the inspection terminal 207a or based on the control signal from the inspection device 300. The prize ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 may be configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 by the bonus ratio management chip 207. Further, the inspection device 300 directly outputs a signal requesting the MPU 201 to transmit the prize ball number table 202e, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and directly transmits the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300. You may try to do it. Further, the specification is such that the pachinko machine 10 is turned on after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, and the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201. You may try to do it. As a result, the bonus ball ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the need for the prize ball number data setting area 265a and can reduce the number of registers.

Further, the main control device 110 may not transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300, and may set the prize ball number for the inspection device 300 manually. As a result, the main control device 110 does not have to control the transmission of the prize ball number table 202e, so that it is possible to prevent the program of the MPU 201 and the program of the bonus ratio management chip 207 from becoming complicated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the prize ball number table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. good. As a result, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the bonus ball ratio and the continuous bonus ball ratio, with reference to the prize ball number table 202e.

In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 may be provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. good. As a result, even if the reading speed of the information read from the second reading memory 264 and the transmission speed for transmitting the information to the accessory ratio management chip 207 are different, the second reading speed can be obtained via the output register. 2 Information can be easily transmitted from the reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300.

In each of the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, information on the accessory ratio and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263, the first reading memory 263 is stored even while the power is turned off. It may be configured to be possible, and when power is supplied, information regarding the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. Also with this, it is possible to calculate the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio without omission with respect to the number of prize balls paid out after being recorded in the second reading memory 264 and before the power is turned off. .. Further, since the recording is performed in the second reading memory 264 when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the power is completely cut off during the recording in the second reading memory 264.

In each of the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the information regarding the accessory ratio and the like is automatically obtained by the control of the CPU 261 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. The case of recording to the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, "power off" or "power off" or as a timing (trigger) for recording information on the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. It may be possible to specify "power supply". When the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power off", it is based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 when it is detected that the power is turned off. , Information about the accessory ratio and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", the first reading is performed when the power is supplied. Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information regarding the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, according to the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201, the power is turned off to record the information regarding the accessory ratio and the like based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. It can be done in some cases or when power is supplied. If "power supply" can be specified as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory, or the first reading memory 263 may be supplied with a backup voltage. The reading memory 263 may be configured so that it can be stored even when the power is turned off.

In each of the above embodiments, in the trigger information data 202f, the timing (trigger) for recording the information regarding the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is "the number of shots". , "Time", and "game time" are specified. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, the "power supply time" may be defined. When the information indicating the "power supply time" is specified in the trigger information data 202f, the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing to record the information related to the accessory ratio etc. in the second reading memory 264 is also specified. You may. For example, when the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "power supply time" and information indicating 4 hours as "predetermined time", the accessory ratio management chip 207 is set in the trigger setting area 265b. At the stage when the trigger information data 202f is set, the time indicated by the RTC266 is acquired, the acquired time is stored in the memory as the "power supply time measurement start time", and then the time indicated by the RTC266 is used. It is determined from the difference from the "power supply time measurement start time" whether 4 hours have passed since the power was supplied, and when 4 hours have passed, the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores the time in the first reading memory 263. Information on the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information provided. Then, the time when the recording is performed is acquired from the RTC266, the time is stored in the memory as a new "power supply time measurement start time", and then the time indicated by the RTC266 and the "power supply time measurement" are stored. From the difference from the "start time", it may be determined whether another 4 hours have passed. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the power supply time, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 does not play much games, the power supply time has elapsed, so that the role is surely used. It is possible to calculate the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Therefore, it is possible to make the inspection device 300 surely analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent activity by the reliably calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

In the second embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264, which indicates the total number of balls won in each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. Was transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the prize ball number table 202e. On the other hand, when the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening for each timing (trigger) shown in the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection device 300, it is based on the information for each timing. Therefore, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio at each timing may be calculated, and the information indicating the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, the winning combination ratio and the continuous winning combination are based on the information. The object ratio may be calculated, and the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, it is not necessary to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Further, when the inspection device 300 calculates the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set illegally or incorrectly. However, if the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated accurately.

Further, not limited to the second embodiment, the second reading memory 264 does not store information indicating the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, and the information necessary for calculating at least one of these is the first. When the information is stored in the 2 reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. , The calculated bonus / continuous bonus ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with or in place of the information stored in the second reading memory 264. As a result, it is not necessary to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Further, when the inspection device 300 calculates the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set illegally or incorrectly. However, if the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated accurately. Further, if the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are output in the inspection device 300. When it is determined that there is a suspicious point, the cause can be searched for based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the inspection device 300, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio output from the bonus ratio management chip 207 are used. By determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether or not any fraudulent activity has been performed.

In each of the above embodiments, an out switch 208f for detecting a ball guided to the ball discharge path is provided, and the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f is counted to determine the number of balls launched into the game area. Although the case of counting is described, various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls fired into the game area. For example, an out port switch for detecting a ball that has passed through the out port 66 is provided, the number of balls that have passed through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch, and the first start detected by the first start port switch 208a. The number of balls that have passed through the mouth 64a, the number of balls that have passed through the second starting port 64b detected by the second starting port switch 208b, and the first normal winning port 63a detected by the first normal winning port switch 208c. The number of balls that have passed through, the number of balls that have passed through the second ordinary winning opening 63b detected by the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, and the balls that have passed through the large winning opening 65a detected by the large winning opening switch 208e. The number of balls fired into the game area may be calculated by summing up with the number of balls. Further, a supply ball detection switch that detects a ball supplied to the ball launch unit 112a and a foul ball that is launched by the ball launch unit 112a and detects a ball ejected from the ball guide passage as a foul ball without reaching the game area. A ball launched into the game area by a counter provided with a detection switch, which counts up by 1 each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch and counts down by 1 each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. You may count the number of. Further, instead of the supply ball detection switch, a launch ball detection switch for detecting the ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a is provided, and each time the ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch, the count is increased by 1 to detect a foul ball. The number of balls fired into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by 1 each time the switch detects a ball. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects a ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area to detect the game ball. By providing a counter that counts up by 1 each time a ball is detected by the switch, the ball launched into the game area may be counted.

In each of the above embodiments, the CPU 261 is provided on the accessory ratio management chip 207, and information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the software executed by the CPU 261 to be an inspection device. The case of transmitting to 300 has been described. On the other hand, some or all the functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By configuring with wired logic, it is possible to manage information on the accessory ratio at high speed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 records information on the accessory ratio, and the information is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, information on the accessory ratio is recorded in the non-volatile memory by the MPU 201, and the information recorded in the non-volatile memory by the MPU 201 is transmitted to the inspection device 300. It may be controlled to do so. As a result, the information on the winning of the ball at each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the information on the ball guided to the ball discharge path can be used by the MPU 201 itself without transferring to another chip, and the information on the accessory ratio can be obtained. Since it can be managed, it is less susceptible to noise, and information on the accessory ratio can be managed more accurately.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main control device 110 so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the main control device 110 are connected to each other. In this case, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be housed in the same board box 100 as the main control device 110, or may be housed in a board box different from the board box 100 in which the main control device 110 is housed. good. When the accessory ratio management chip 207 is stored in a board box separate from the main control device 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a board box dedicated to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or other control. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be housed in any of the board boxes 101 to 104 in which the apparatus and the like are housed.

Further, the bonus ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the bonus ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, the information regarding the winning of each winning opening from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 (for example, the ball that has won a prize within a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening). Information indicating the number) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, in the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out) and which winning opening the prize ball is associated with are determined. Based on the prize ball command, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262 in the area corresponding to the winning opening where the prize was won, and the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262. By adding the number of prize balls to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning opening for each winning opening at the counter. You may count the number. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In these cases, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main control device 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on in the main control device 110. May be transmitted by a command to the payout control device 111. As a result, the payout control device 111 can manage the bonus ratio and the like by using these information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the voice lamp control device 113, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the voice lamp control device 113 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, the information regarding the winning of each winning opening from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, a ball that has won a prize within a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening). Information indicating the number of the characters) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Further, by managing the bonus ratio by the bonus ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113, the calculated bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, etc. are displayed in order to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A command may be sent to the control device 114. By displaying on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily find a pachinko machine 10 having a strange character ratio or continuous character ratio, or to prevent a fraudulent person from committing a misconduct. can. Further, when the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), the voice output device 226 determines the bonus ratio. The voice lamp control device 113 controls to output the notification sound of the lamp, and to turn on / blink the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined mode, or to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81. A command may be sent to the display control device 114. As a result, the hall personnel can easily find the pachinko machine 10 suspected of being fraudulent, and can prevent the fraudster from committing a misconduct. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main control device by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. It may be transmitted by a command from 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the accessory ratio and the like by using these information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, the information regarding the winning of each winning opening (for example, for each winning opening, for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds)) from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. Information indicating the number of winning balls in between) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Further, by managing the bonus ratio with the bonus ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the control for displaying the calculated bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, etc. on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Device 114 may do. By displaying on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily find a pachinko machine 10 having a strange character ratio or continuous character ratio, or to prevent a fraudulent person from committing a misconduct. can. Further, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), the predetermined display is displayed on the third symbol. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81. As a result, the hall personnel can easily find the pachinko machine 10 suspected of being fraudulent, and can prevent the fraudster from committing a misconduct. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main control device by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. It may be transmitted by a command from 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display control device 114 can manage the accessory ratio and the like by using these information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is mounted on the substrate provided with the main control device 110 or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 is mounted. A display device provided with a plurality of 7-segment displays is provided on a board provided with a control device that realizes a function, and the display device is related to a bonus ratio, a continuous bonus ratio, a bonus ratio, and a continuous bonus ratio. Information or information indicating game performance (for example, a base value, etc.) may be displayed. The display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is on a board provided with the main control device 110, is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or is equipped with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or is a function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is not provided on the board provided with the control device that realizes the above, but is connected to the board provided with the main control device 110 or the accessory ratio management chip 207, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 is mounted. Alternatively, it may be provided in connection with a board provided with a control device that realizes the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It may be assembled as follows.

The information regarding the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning slot, or to all winning slots. The total number of balls paid out by winning the prize, the total number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening (in this embodiment, the second starting opening 64b and the large winning opening 65a) in which the accessory operates, and the winning combination. It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize in a winning opening (in this embodiment, a large winning opening 65a) in which an object operates continuously. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (number of fired balls) may be included in the information regarding the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is composed of a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display, or the like instead of the 7-segment display, and the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the combination. Information related to the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed.

Information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance displayed on the display device was recorded in the latest second reading memory 264. At the timing (trigger), the information itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the information generated from the information may be used. Further, at the timing (trigger) of recording to a plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, the recording itself to the second reading memory 264 or the recording to the second reading memory 264 at each timing is recorded. The information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. Further, at the timing (trigger) of recording to a plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 or all the timings (trigger) recorded in the second reading memory 264. ), The average value of the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the information related to the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is taken, and the average value is displayed on the display device. You may. Furthermore, not only the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is reflected in the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio. Related information or information indicating game performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

As a result, by looking at the display device, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity was performed from the information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. Can be judged. It should be noted that this display device may simultaneously display any one of the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus, the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, and the information indicating the game performance, or display them one by one. You may let me. Further, any one of the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, and the information indicating the game performance may be alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. When displaying alternately, information indicating what is being displayed may also be displayed. In addition, when the bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device or other information exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the bonus ratio exceeds 70%, the continuous bonus ratio If it exceeds 60%), the displayed accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio and other information may be displayed in a different color from the usual one, or may be displayed in a blinking manner. Further, in the display device, the pachinko machine 10 may have a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power is turned on, or until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Only during the period until the predetermined processing is completed, such as a period), information related to the bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, or information indicating game performance. May be displayed. As a result, the hall personnel confirm the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity. Further, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the display device, the information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the game performance is shown. Information may be displayed. As a result, the hall personnel can easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity by checking the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. .. In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the information related to the bonus ratio to the display device, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. The display may be a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 10 seconds, or a period until the process related to power off is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (for example, until the process of S705 is completed). , It may be a period until the predetermined processing is completed). In addition, information related to the bonus ratio to the display device, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is , A backup power source, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, or the like may be used. Further, the display device may be housed in the board box. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display device from displaying an invalid value.

Further, the display device is provided with a button for displaying information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, and the button is operated. In this case, the display device may be made to display information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. As a result, only when the bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and other information are confirmed, by operating the button, information related to the bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, and continuous bonus ratio Or, since the information indicating the game performance can be displayed on the display device, it is possible to suppress the wasteful consumption of power consumption in the display device. Further, the button operation is effective only when the game is in the non-execution state in the pachinko machine 10, and the display device is provided with information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio. Alternatively, information indicating the game performance may be displayed. The determination that the game is not executed in the pachinko machine 10 is determined, for example, when the detection of the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is not detected for a predetermined time or longer, or when the operation handle 51 is rotated. If not, it may be performed when the ball launching unit 112a is not executed, or when the ball guided to the game area is not detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from attempting to commit some kind of fraud by looking at the information displayed on the display device while playing the game.

Further, the operation of the button may be effective only when the button is operated in combination with another button. As a result, a fraudster who does not know the effective combination of button operations displays information related to the bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, or information indicating game performance. It can be prevented from being easily displayed on the device. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is powered by operating a button for displaying information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device. The display device may display information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance only when the above is input. As a result, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10, by operating the button together, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus displayed on the display device are displayed. By confirming the information related to the product ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there was any fraudulent activity during the business hours of the previous day or outside the business hours of the night. Further, while operating the button for displaying the information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied. Only when the above is refused, information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance may be displayed on the display device. As a result, when a person involved in the hall turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the button together, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus displayed on the display device are displayed. By confirming the information related to the product ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there was any fraudulent activity before today's business or during today's business. The display of the bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio, the information related to the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device by operating the button ends based on the lapse of a predetermined period. It may be terminated when the button is operated again. Further, only during the period in which the operation of the button is continuously performed, the information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is displayed. May be good.

If the button is operated and the display device displays information related to the bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, or information indicating game performance, the pachinko machine The game mode of 10 may be set as a check mode, and the main control of the game in the main control device 110 may be temporarily stopped. As a result, as the game progresses, the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device, the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, or the information indicating the game performance changes. , It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to confirm the accessory ratio and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode and temporarily stops the main control of the game with respect to the voice lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). A command may be sent to notify the transition to the check mode. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive the command notifying the transition to the check mode, for example, the third symbol display device 81 receives a predetermined image corresponding to the check mode (for example, a black screen). ) Is displayed, the fluctuation effect during execution is continuously changed at high speed during the check mode period, the voice output from the voice output device 226 is also the predetermined voice corresponding to the check mode, and the voice corresponding to the high speed fluctuation. May be controlled to output. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. Further, at the stage where the main control device 110 cancels the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 and restarts the main control of the game, the check mode is set with respect to the voice lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). You may send a command notifying that it will be canceled. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are returned to those before the transition to the check mode. Can be done.

Further, in the modified examples described so far, when the button operation is performed, the display device provided on the substrate such as the main control device 110 has a bonus ratio, a continuous bonus ratio, a bonus ratio, and a continuous bonus ratio. The case of displaying related information or information indicating game performance has been described, but when a button operation is performed in addition to or instead of this, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is performed. 81, the lamp display device 227 or the like may display information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio, or information indicating the game performance, or may output audio. The device 226 may output a bonus ratio, a continuous bonus ratio, or some kind of notification sound indicating the game performance. Further, in this case as well, the above-mentioned modification may be appropriately applied in connection with the button operation.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the case where the information related to the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but instead of this, it has been described so far. When the button operation is performed, the information related to the accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. In this case as well, the above-mentioned modification may be appropriately applied in connection with the button operation.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but the main control device is based on the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207. Various information such as the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be displayed on the display device provided on the substrate such as 110, and can be used as the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 227, and the like. Information on the object ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance is displayed, and some notification sound regarding the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the game performance is output from the voice output device 226. When configured to perform some kind of notification, transmission to the inspection device 300 does not necessarily have to be performed.

In each of the above embodiments, when a large-capacity capacitor 267 or a secondary battery is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 In the above, the case where the process associated with the power failure is executed by using the electric power charged in the capacitor 267 has been described. On the other hand, instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. As a result, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be retained even while the power is turned off. Further, when the fraudster tries to set the fraudulent information in the buffer 262 in the midnight time zone, the overtime information is stored in the overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then the second reading is performed at a predetermined timing. The out-of-hours information can be recorded in the game state data 264d of the memory 264.

In the above embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S724 (see FIG. 19) whether or not the interruption signal after setting the buffer 262 is transmitted by the MPU 201 in the midnight time zone, the time indicated by the RTC266 is set. , The image explaining the case of determining whether or not it is between midnight and 6 o'clock in the early morning, and the threshold time of the time used for determining the midnight time zone may be set by the MPU 201. For example, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores the midnight time zone determination time data that defines the threshold value of the time, and in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e In addition to the trigger information data 202f, the midnight time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not the interrupt signal after the setting of the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is transmitted in the time zone indicated by the midnight time zone determination time data. As a result, the determination of the midnight time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC266 at that time, and is predetermined. At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. Further, when the power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC266 at that time. As a result, information regarding the time when the power is turned on is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the cause can be investigated from multiple perspectives, including the time when the power is turned on.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the power cut information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC266 at that time. At a predetermined timing, the power off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be composed of a non-volatile memory or may be supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the power cut information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 does not necessarily have to be composed of a non-volatile memory or to be supplied with a backup voltage. As a result, information regarding the time when the power is turned off is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the cause can be investigated from multiple perspectives, including the time when the power is turned off.

In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main control device 110 is cut off and the processes of S704 to S707 are executed in the main process of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17), after the process of S704 is executed, S705 The same process as the process of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed before the process of S15 is executed. That is, after prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing in the processing when the power is turned off (S704), the values of the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the normal 1 counter 203f, the normal 2 counter 203g, and the large winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203. Is used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information, and is set in the bonus ratio management chip 207 together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, and an interrupt signal is transmitted to the bonus ratio management chip 207. You may. As a result, the power is cut off for the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls that are guided to the ball discharge path and are not counted in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It can be counted by the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, the number of balls won in each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without omission.

In each of the above embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio, which is shown in the trigger information data 202f, is the "game time", the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected. The case where the game time is calculated by counting the time spent has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an out port switch for detecting a ball that has passed through the out port 66 is provided, and the out port switch, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning port switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning port are provided. When the passage of a ball to each winning opening or out opening is detected by either the switch 208d or the large winning opening switch 208e, the game time is calculated by counting the detected time. May be good. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time when it is determined that the player is touching the operation handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operation handle 51. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the 51 is rotated by the player, or the time during which the player touches the operation handle 51 and rotates the operation handle 51 is accumulated. The game time may be calculated. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball launch unit 112a is driven by the launch control device 112 and the ball is launched. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area is continuously detected by the game ball detection switch is counted. By doing so, the game time may be calculated.

In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is set in advance by the main control device 110 so that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol cannot be changed by a person related to the hall or the like. However, instead of this, a hall-related person or the like may be configured to change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol to a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). As a result, on the hall side, by making the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol different for each pachinko machine of the same model, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting the machine. ..

The jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed as follows, for example. First, the jackpot random value and the jackpot random value at the corresponding level (stage) are set for each of a plurality of stages (hereinafter, referred to as 6 stages (levels 1 to 6)) in which the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. / Or the winning random value of the second symbol is stored in ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot random value and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each level determines the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol at that level.

The main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, or may be made to appear by opening the back pack 92. Further, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for a keyhole so that the keyhole is exposed from the opening. The keyhole is configured to be rotatable between two positions, the "probability setting off" side and the "probability setting on" side, by a dedicated key, and when it is on the "probability setting off" side, it becomes a keyhole. On the other hand, the dedicated key can be inserted and removed. When the keyhole is set to the "probability setting on" position by the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. When the keyhole is rotated from the "probability setting off" to the "probability setting on" position by the dedicated key while the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. As a result, it is possible to safely change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol at the time of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. If the keyhole is rotated from the "probability setting off" to the "probability setting on" position by a dedicated key while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is on, the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol The winning probability may not be changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from illegally changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol during business.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a push-type probability setting button on the main board for changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. Like the keyhole, this probability setting button is usually covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the probability setting button so that the probability setting button is exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level (step) of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol so far is displayed on, for example, a display device provided on the main board. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by one, and it is displayed on the display device. If the level before the probability setting button is pressed is "6", the level "1" is displayed on the display device when the probability setting button is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level (instead of the previous jackpot probability and / or the hit probability level of the second symbol). For example, it may be level "1").

When the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability level of the second symbol to be set is displayed on the display device, the jackpot value or the second level displayed on the display device is displayed. The hit value of the symbol is set, and the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. Also, when the level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol you want to set is displayed, if the keyhole into which the dedicated key is inserted is rotated to the "probability setting off" position, that display. The jackpot value of the level displayed on the device or the hit value of the second symbol may be set so that the pachinko machine 10 is started. Also with this, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and / or the hit probability of the second symbol.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying information related to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio, the pachinko machine 10 sets the probability. When activated in the mode, the display device may display the level of the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability to be set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost increase by suppressing the increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10. Further, by also using a display device and suppressing an increase in the number of parts, it is possible to easily arrange (layout) each part.

By the way, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio naturally change according to the change. Therefore, whether the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio managed by the bonus ratio management chip 207 is due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, or due to some kind of fraud. There is a risk of getting lost.

Therefore, when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be deleted. .. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the influence of changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. Further, in this case, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. May be. As a result, it can be grasped at the inspection stage that the information and the like recorded in the second reading memory 264 have been deleted due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and whether or not there is an error. It can be used as a reference for the judgment of. In this case, the date and time when the change was made may be stored together. Further, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may include information indicating the changed level or may include information on the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there was fraud.

On the other hand, even when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 remain stored. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is fraud before the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed. Further, in this case, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You may. Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the influence of the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. In addition, information indicating the level after the change may be included, or information on the level before the change may be included. Based on these dates and times and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors of changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

Further, even if the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are stored. In this case, the jackpot probability and / or the hit of the second symbol is applied to the display device provided for displaying the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio. After the probability is changed, the bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio, or the bonus ratio or continuous bonus ratio is set based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and / or the first reading memory 263. The relevant information may be displayed. Therefore, regarding the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on this display device, or the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed. Therefore, the influence of changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be eliminated, and the fraudulent activity after the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be easily detected. Further, in this case, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time when the change is made. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is easily determined, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are based on the information. Information related to the ratio, or the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio can be displayed.

Further, even when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are stored. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 separately for each level (stage) of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. As a result, for each level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio when the level is set are determined from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. be able to. Therefore, the change in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is clearly switched and analyzed. can.

When the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, only one or a plurality of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 immediately before may be saved, and the others may be deleted. Further, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be left as it is. Further, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be erased, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be saved. As a result, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the influence of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio before the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed on the analysis and display, while the jackpot probability and / or It is possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed before the winning probability of the second symbol is changed. In this case, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. good. As a result, it can be easily determined whether or not the influence of the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. It is possible to grasp at the inspection stage that some of the information, etc. has been deleted due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, which can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there was fraud. can. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. In addition, information indicating the level after the change may be included, or information on the level before the change may be included. Based on these dates and times and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors of changes in the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

In each of the above embodiments, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 cannot be erased from the outside, so that the fraudster cannot erase the evidence of the fraudulent act. .. On the other hand, there is also a second-hand market in the pachinko machine market, which is often sold from one store to another and installed at other stores. In this case, even if a fraudulent act is performed at the previous store and the accessory ratio or the like is changed, if the information remains in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, the current situation is There was a risk of suspicion that there was fraudulent activity at another store. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when the product is sold from one store to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 may be deleted or the information to be resold may be deleted. It may be possible to record in the second reading memory 264. By erasing the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, it is possible to prevent the record of fraudulent activity performed in the previous one store from being taken over by the next other store. can. In addition, if the information to be resold is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information related to the character ratio in the previous one store and the information related to the character ratio in the next other store can be clearly set. In addition to being able to perform analysis, it is also possible to discover fraudulent activities committed at the previous store from information related to the ratio of goods in the previous store.

Erasing the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 and recording the resold information in the second reading memory 264 are limited to some manufacturers of the pachinko machine 10. It should be limited to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the record of fraudulent activity from being easily deleted or deceived. Further, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 may be erased, and the resold information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 by the following method. .. For example, by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a and inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264. A program for erasing the information and recording the resold information in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. By making this command a secret special command other than some people, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from easily deleting or cheating the record of fraudulent activity. Further, only when a hole such as a keyhole is provided in the main board and a key or the like matching the hole is inserted, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. The program for recording the information in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, only those who have the key or the like that fits the hole can erase the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, or the information resold to the second reading memory 264. Since the recording can be performed, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from easily deleting or cheating the record of the fraudulent activity. Further, a switch is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is housed, and only when the switch is operated, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. A program for recording the information to be stored in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, the switch cannot be operated unless the board box 100 is opened, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 is erased, and the information resold is transferred to the second reading memory 264. I can't record. As described above, in the board box 100, the box base and the box cover are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure), and the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover extends over the box base and the box cover. A seal is attached. Therefore, since the board box cannot be easily opened by the fraudster, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from easily deleting or cheating the record of the fraudulent activity. Further, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, the evidence of the opening remains, so that it can be easily determined that the fraudulent act has been performed.

In the third to seventh embodiments, as the process of using the area 203y outside the used area in the RAM 203, the process relating to the accessory ratio and the base value is exemplified, but the process is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control of the game is performed. It may be various processing except for. For example, it may be a process for determining fraudulent activity. In the process of determining this fraudulent activity, for example, it is determined whether or not the magnet is approaching or vibrating, or there is an unnatural entry into the winning opening (a ball detected even when the large winning opening 65a is closed). , Processing for notifying when there is a fraudulent act may be performed. Further, as the process of using the area 203y outside the used area, a plurality of processes having different functions (purposes) (for example, "process related to the accessory ratio" and "process of determining fraudulent activity") may be included.

In the third to seventh embodiments, the case where the contents of the register 200 are saved to the outer work area 203y1 of the area outside the used area 203y by using the load (LD) instruction has been described, but this is used as the load (LD) instruction. Even if the store (ST) command is used instead to evacuate to the outer work area 203y1 of the area outside the used area 203y, the same effect can be obtained.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments, in addition to the real-time base value, three base values (previous base value, previous two-time base value, and previous two-time base value) counted for each predetermined period in the past are displayed as a base display device. Although the case of displaying on 401 has been described, at least two base values counted in each predetermined period in the past (for example, the previous base value and the previous two base values) may be displayed together with the real-time base value. , Four or more base values counted for each predetermined period in the past may be displayed together with the real-time base value.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where each base value measured in a plurality of periods and the base value being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401 has been described, but instead of the base value, Alternatively, in addition to the base value, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the information related to the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, and / or other information indicating the game performance are measured in a plurality of periods, respectively. And what was measured in real time may be displayed on the display device.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where the base value processing (FIG. 41) is executed by the MPU 201 and various base values are displayed on the base display device 401 has been described, but the management for managing the base values on the main control device 110 has been described. A chip is provided, or a management chip that manages the base value is provided separately from the main control device 110, and the management chip executes the same processing as the base value processing to calculate the real-time base value while calculating the real-time base value. , The previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401, or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201. Further, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

Further, the various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, and the flag 203p shown in FIG. 39A may be stored in the RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM all erasure switch is turned on, the MPU 201 sends a signal to notify the management chip during the startup process, and the management chip receives the signal. , Various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, base value data 203l to 203o, flag 203p, and the like may be initialized.

Further, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to turn on all the segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip starts up when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on, the MPU 201 sends an initialization signal to the management chip in the start-up process. May be transmitted, and the control may be executed in the process of receiving the initialization signal and executing the control chip.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base are displayed on the base display device 401, if there is no valid base value as the base value, the comparison segment is used. The case where "---" is displayed to indicate that there is no valid base value has been described. On the other hand, if there is no valid base value as the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value in the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value. In addition, it is possible to prevent the previous base value, the base value two times before, and the base value two times before last from being displayed unnecessarily without a valid base value. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and the previous base value may be displayed as "---" in the comparison segment. This can also indicate that there is no valid base value in the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value. Further, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it can be suggested that the previous base value and the like are also displayed on the base display device 401 after the effective base value is obtained.

If there is a valid base value for the previous base value and there is no valid base value for the previous two times base value and the previous two times base value, only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401. You may. Also, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the previous two times base value, and there is no valid base value for the previous two times base value, only the real-time base value, the previous time base value, and the previous two times base value are displayed as a base display device. It may be displayed on 401. This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the base value that is not displayed. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary display of items for which there is no valid base value.

On the other hand, if there is a valid base value in the previous base value and there is no valid base value as the previous two times base value and the previous two times base value, the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the previous two times base value are displayed as a base display device. It may be displayed on 401, and "---" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two times before. Also, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the previous two times base value, and there is no valid base value for the previous two times base value, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous two times base value, and the previous two times base value are not present. The base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "---" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two times before. This can also indicate a type of base value for which there is no valid base value. Further, by displaying one base value of a type having no valid base value, it can be suggested that the base value of that type is displayed on the base display device 401 after the valid base value is obtained.

In the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on are predetermined. Although the case of lighting for a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, instead of lighting, all the segments may be blinked for a predetermined period. By blinking all the segments, it is possible to confirm not only whether all the segments can be turned on normally but also whether all the segments can be turned off normally, and whether or not the display of the base display device 401 is normally performed. It is easy to judge.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, for example, the entire RAM is started. All segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 after the power is turned on while the erase switch is operated until the total number of outs reaches 300. (Including) may be turned on or blinked for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the display of the base display device 401 is normally performed at least at the time of new startup of the pachinko machine 10. Further, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state while the lighting is performed.

Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are used for a predetermined period (this embodiment). Then, it may be turned on or blinked for 5 seconds).

In the fifth embodiment, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 are used for a predetermined period (this embodiment). Then, the case where the control of lighting (or blinking) for 5 seconds is executed at a predetermined position (S3007) in the startup process (see FIG. 40) has been described, but the control of lighting (or blinking) is the startup process. It may be done at any place in. For example, the control may be executed first when the execution of the start-up process is started, or the control may be executed after the initial setting (S601). Further, the control may be executed after the interrupt permission is set (S613). Further, the control may be executed at a place other than the start-up process. For example, in the main process (see FIG. 17) executed after the start-up process is completed, the control may be executed before the loop process (S701 to S703) is executed. Further, among the timer interrupt processes, for example, in the base value process (see FIG. 41), which is one of the timer interrupt processes, the timer interrupt process or the base value process is executed only after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether or not the control has been performed, and the control may be executed when the control is executed for the first time after the power is turned on. That is, after the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are turned on (or blinked) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up at a manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, or the like. Until the total number of outs reaches 300, every time the power is turned on, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are used for a predetermined period (this). In the embodiment, the light is turned on for 5 seconds), and then the display of the base display device 401 is made to blink (or light) "88." In the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is set to the ratio segment. The case where the display is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, which is displayed in blinking (or lit), has been described. In this case, each time the power is turned on, the 7 segments provided in the base display device 401 are displayed. It may not be executed to light all the segments (including the dot segment) of the displays 401a to 401d for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In this case, since the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in a special display mode during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, it can be shown that the displayed base value is not a regular base value. In addition, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state by performing the display.

Further, in the fifth embodiment or the above-mentioned modification, "88." is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment as a special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period. In addition, the mode in which the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed blinking (or lit) in the ratio segment has been described, but this mode is not always necessary, and the mode in which the normal base value is displayed is described. May display the base display device 401 in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, "bL.", "B1.", "B2.", And "b3." Are switched and displayed at 5-second intervals while blinking the identification segment. The base display device 401 may be displayed in a mode in which "---" is lit and displayed on the comparison segment. This makes it possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state while this display is being performed. Further, in this embodiment, while "bL." Is displayed blinking, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be lit or blinked in the ratio segment. This makes it possible to show the real-time base value at that time as a reference.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. The stage that can be changed is not limited to 6 stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, the case where the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described, but when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small hit. , In place of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and / or the winning probability of the second symbol, the winning probability of the small hit may be changed. Here, the small hit is a kind of miss, and when a ball enters the large winning opening 65a opened by the small hit and the ball is paid out, the number of the paid out balls is also calculated as the base value. Used for. That is, when the winning probability of a small hit is changed, the base value also changes, so if the base value data 203r based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the base value based on the changed probability setting value remains. Cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may also be deleted in the deletion of the RAM 203 data that is started when the setting change mode is started and the probability setting value is changed. .. As a result, the base value based on the changed probability set value can be calculated correctly.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a case where it is confirmed whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") is confirmed every time the timer interrupt process is executed. However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. In addition, this confirmation is executed every time a predetermined opportunity comes, such as every time a variable effect is started, every predetermined time (for example, every hour, or every time the clock provided inside reaches 00 minutes). You may do it.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, it is confirmed whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") in the timer interrupt process, and the probability set value is in the normal range. If it is not inside, the case where the game is stopped and the pachinko machine 10 is re-started to notify the hall personnel and the like to change the probability set value is explained, but after the game is stopped. , The setting change process may be executed to force the hall personnel to change the probability setting value. In this case, a notification sound prompting the change of the probability set value may be output, or a notification may be given to the third symbol display device 81 to call a person related to the hall. Further, the external terminal (not shown) provided in the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the probability setting value can be reset within a normal range by a person involved in the hall or the like.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is confirmed in the start-up process whether the RAM determination value is normal, and the RAM determination value is normal. If not, further check whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, execute the setting change process and have the hall personnel change the probability setting value. The case was explained. Instead of executing this setting change process, the voice output device 226 and the third symbol display device 81 urge the hall personnel and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability set value. And / or from an external terminal (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, and enter an infinite loop. You may do it. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted and the probability set value can be changed for the hall personnel and the like.

In addition, when it is determined in the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is set from the range of "1" to "6". It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, in the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcibly set the probability set value to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to the sudden change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol during the game.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, it is forced. The setting change process is executed to have the hall related persons change the probability setting value, or the hall related persons are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value is normal. A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on are displayed. The case where the pachinko machine is lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, but also in the sixth to eighth embodiments, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. All segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be turned on or blinked for a predetermined period. However, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on until the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be troublesome to light or blink for a predetermined period. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, lighting or blinking of all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be non-executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are lit or blinking after the setting change processing or the setting committee confirmation processing is executed. May be executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are once turned on or blinked for a predetermined period to be specified. When the operation is performed, the lighting or blinking may be terminated.

In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the base display device 401 is provided with an identification segment composed of two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b and a ratio segment composed of two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the case of being configured has been described, the identification segment may be composed of one or two or more 7-segment displays, or the ratio segment may be composed of two or more 7-segment displays.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the jackpot symbol, the LED for notifying the hit symbol, and the like provided in the first symbol display device 37 are used, or the entire LED 37a is used. Although the case of notifying that the setting changing display or the setting confirming display is being performed on the base display device 401 by using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification has been described, the first symbol display device has been described. Using the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the jackpot symbol, the LED for notifying the hit symbol, etc. prepared in 37, or using the lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification for the entire LED 37a, The base display device 401 may notify that the error history is being displayed.

Further, the first display device 37 is provided with one LED for notifying that the setting changing display and the setting checking display are being performed on the base display device 401, and for example, by turning on the LED. The base display device 401 notifies that the setting changing display is being performed, and the LED is blinked to notify that the base display device 401 is performing the setting confirmation display. May be good. Further, the first display device 37 is informed that the LED for notifying that the setting changing display is being performed on the base display device 401 and the setting confirmation display being performed on the base display device 401. A total of two LEDs, one for notification and the other for notification, are provided, and by lighting the corresponding LEDs, it is possible to notify that the setting changing display or the setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401. You may. Further, the first display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and by turning on the LED, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. It may be notified that the display is being performed.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are turned off, or the identification segment is set to " Although the case of displaying "-" or displaying fixed characters on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case of displaying the base value on the base display device 401 has been described, the probability setting has been described. When the value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, the predetermined segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b may be blinked and displayed, or the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b may be turned on and blinked in order or randomly. Further, in the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value or the error history is displayed.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off or "-" is displayed. The case of displaying fixed characters or displaying the fixed characters has been described, but when displaying the probability set value or the error history on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment has the base display device 401. If the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed on the screen, the display may be performed in any display mode. For example, a predetermined segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be blinked and displayed, or each segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be turned on and blinked in order or randomly. Further, on the 7-segment display 401c, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, as a display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, an example shown in FIG. 50 is illustrated, and a display mode when the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. The case where the display mode is different from that of the above has been described. On the other hand, the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same display mode as that shown in FIGS. 49 (a) or 49 (b). In this case, the display mode when the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. The probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person related to the hall or the like presses the error display button 502. That is, even if the display mode when the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 are the same display mode, the hall personnel and the like perform themselves. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history based on the operation.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although the case of using the setting key 501 has been described, this may be performed by using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be rotated from the on state to the setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. It is configured by encouraging the setting key 501 to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

Further, in the sixth and eighth embodiments, the case where the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode has been described, but the seventh embodiment has been described. The probability setting value may be updated by providing the same setting change switch as above and turning on the setting change switch. As a result, the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch are clearly separated, so that the operator can clearly understand the role of each switch.

In the sixth to eighth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is set by turning off the setting key 501 or by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122. Although the case of confirming the above has been described, it may be possible to perform this by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change mode, and like the error display button 502, the main board is formed through a hole provided in the board box 100. It may be provided so as to be more prominent and can be operated by a person involved in the hall or the like without opening the board box 100. Also with this, the probability set value can be easily determined.

In the eighth embodiment, when a person involved in the hall or the like performs a startup operation in any of the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode in the RAM abnormality, the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 is used. In the process of S4215 of the start-up process to be executed, it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S4219, and the notification by the RAM error setting process (S4219). An infinite loop state has been described after executing the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220). On the other hand, in this case, after executing the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and the output (S4220) to the hall computer 600, the process may be shifted to the process of S4213 and the setting change process may be executed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated normally by surely resetting the probability set value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Further, in this case, since the setting change process is automatically executed, it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 10 again, and it is possible to save the trouble of those involved in the hall.

Of the data stored in the RAM 203 in the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the eighth embodiment, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the established setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). ) Is deleted (cleared), and the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1 is deleted, while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are not deleted. Although the case of holding the data in S4216 has been described, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (establishment setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1) is the same as in the start-up process S4216. While erasing (clearing) the predetermined data (excluding the data 203x11), the accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 are used. You may keep it without erasing it. That is, the RAM clear after the setting change process and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode may be the same process.

In the eighth embodiment, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode. Even if it is another startup operation, the case where the setting change mode is set so that the setting change process is re-executed from the beginning has been explained. On the other hand, only when the start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, the setting change process is started from the beginning. Start up as a setting change mode to be executed again, and the start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the other start-up mode (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting confirmation mode). In the case of the start-up operation corresponding to, the MPU 201 may be in an infinite loop state. In this case, a notification is given to the people involved in the hall to urge them to turn off the power and restart it in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to induce the pachinko machine 10 or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and to surely reset the probability setting value.

Further, when the start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that is, the setting key 501). (When is turned on), the startup operation is to restart the setting change process from the beginning and execute it as a setting change mode, and when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change, the startup operation is When the startup operation corresponds to other startup modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, when the setting key 501 is turned off), the MPU 201 is set to an infinite loop state. May be good. In this case, a notification is given to the people involved in the hall to urge them to turn off the power and restart it in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to induce the hall personnel and the like to turn on the setting key 501 and then restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode to ensure that the probability setting value is reset. .. On the other hand, when the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in the ON state, and the hall personnel and the like are ready to smoothly update and confirm the probability setting value. There is. Therefore, in this case, the probability setting value can be surely fixed by starting up in the setting change mode.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. In the case of the start-up operation, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the normal mode has been described. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the middle of updating before the power was turned off last time. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode by ignoring the setting change process executed before the power is turned off and erasing the probability setting value during the update.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on while the setting key 501 is off and the power is turned on. The case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the RAM clear mode when the start-up operation is performed has been described. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the middle of updating before the power was turned off last time. Further, it waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, stands in the normal mode as it is. It may be raised or RAM clear may be executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the RAM clear mode by ignoring the setting change process executed before the power is turned off and erasing the probability setting value during the update. After that, it waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the game can be executed. It may be set to. By waiting until the setting key 501 is turned on, and then waiting for the setting key 501 to be turned off, the setting change mode that was executed when the power was turned off last time is added. It is possible to give the people involved in the hall the feeling that the release of the key has been released.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power. In the case of the start-up operation of turning on, the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is explained as in the start-up operation, but wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, and the setting key 501 is turned on. Then, after waiting for the setting key 501 to be turned off, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the normal mode may be started as it is. As a result, it is possible to give the hall personnel and the like the feeling that the setting change mode, which was executed when the power was turned off last time, has been canceled.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the power supply is turned on with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. I explained the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the setting confirmation mode when the start-up operation is to turn on. , The setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the middle of updating before the power was turned off last time. In this case, the setting confirmation process may be continuously executed after the setting key 501 is turned off, or the setting confirmation process may be ignored. Further, it may be started in the setting confirmation mode, the setting change process executed before the power is turned off may be ignored, and the probability setting value during the update may be deleted.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. In the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10, we explained the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting up in the normal mode. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode, ignoring the setting confirmation process executed before the rejection.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on while the setting key 501 is off and the power is turned on. In the case of the start-up operation of doing, the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode is explained as in the start-up operation of the hall related person, but instead of starting up in the RAM clear mode, the setting confirmation process is performed. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the pachinko machine 10 is executed from the beginning (from the beginning). In this case, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, wait for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the RAM is not cleared. It may be started up in, or RAM clear may be executed.

In the eighth embodiment, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power. Even when the start-up operation of turning on is performed, the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is described as in the start-up operation, but the setting change mode may be ignored and the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting confirmation mode. .. Further, after starting up in the setting confirmation mode, the mode may be changed to the setting change mode as a trigger of a predetermined operation.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the variation start flag is always set to ON when the stop type command is received has been described, but the variation pattern command is received. When the stop type command is received after the above, the fluctuation start flag may be set to on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when the variation pattern command is not received and the stop type command is received.

Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to be on at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on. The variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 is made to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be done. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received. It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, a case where the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may be to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not given the numbers "0" to "9". Further, the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided and the third symbol is provided. In addition to the variation effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed, and continues the game, but displays the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect was performed, so that the player was given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from audio output device 226, or lighting / blinking of illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the voice from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination of them) to prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes that are selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. May be good.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous advance notice effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbol, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27 (c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous advance notice command is received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and the stop symbol determination flag is turned on. , Other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command judgment processing, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 sets the number of reserved balls added by "1" to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start winning prize are included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described for the hold ball number command to be notified to. The type of the counter included in the ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, a command other than the reserved ball count command may include information indicating the values of each counter and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of these values. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas corresponding to the hold counts based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a hold ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether it is a big hit or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and a loss based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. Part or all of the deviation type, etc. in the case of It may be stored in RAM 223.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of reserved balls is determined by the main control device 110 using one reserved ball number counter 203a regardless of whether the ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The case of counting was explained. On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter for the first starting port corresponding to the first starting port 64a, the reserved ball number counter for the second starting port corresponding to the second starting port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Prepared, the number of reserved balls associated with the start winning to the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls associated with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b may be counted separately.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held is set to "4" regardless of whether the balls are won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b has been described. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be held due to the start winning to the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of holding balls that can be held due to the starting winning to the second starting port 64b are separately determined and managed. May be good. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "4". As a result, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls reserved for the start winning to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of reserved balls reserved for the starting winning to the second starting opening 64b. In the situation where is "2", even if the first starting port 64a has a starting prize any more, the starting winning is not suspended, but if the second starting port 64b has a starting winning, it is suspended. You may. As a result, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be recognized by the player as separate ones, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the variable effect based on the start winning to the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to draw more attention to the player at the starting port where the variable effect is preferentially performed.

In the above embodiment, a case where a first start port 64a, a second start port 64b, and two start ports are arranged on the game board 13 as start ports for starting a big hit lottery when a ball is entered will be described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or may be three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding holding ball count counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting opening, and each starting opening is reserved as a result of winning a prize in the corresponding starting opening. You may want to count the number. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held may be set for each starting port in accordance with the starting winning prize to the corresponding starting opening.

Further, when there are two or more starting ports, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the holding has been performed due to the winning of the starting opening is eventually included. It may include information indicating whether the hold was made by winning a prize at the starting point of. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may also include information indicating which start port holds the fluctuation effect. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each start port, and when a hold ball number command is received, a hold ball number counter for the start port indicated by the hold ball number command is provided. When the number of reserved balls is set in, and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing the number of reserved balls counter for the starting port indicated by the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting openings are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in connection with the winning of each starting opening (starting winning) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is the command acquired in connection with the start winning in any of the starting ports. Information indicating the existence may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating which start port the variation effect is associated with the start winning. .. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each start port, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to the corresponding start port is supported. It may be stored in the look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start port that has detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 for each start port. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the starting slot that won the starting prize, whether or not each variation effect will be a jackpot in the look-ahead processing. It is possible to correctly determine the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the loss type in the case of a miss, etc. based on which starting port the starting prize is awarded. Further, when the variation effect based on the start prize to the start port 1 is performed in preference to the variation effect based on the start prize to the other start port, the variation based on the start prize to the start port 1 is performed. The look-ahead process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of hold times of the variable effect that is the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously gives notice when the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the start port is received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (reserved balls) held at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize is given. In addition, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of starting ports and preferentially executes a variable effect for winning a prize at one starting port over a variable effect for winning a prize at another starting port, the variation effect is given priority. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting port where the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. If the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the low-priority start port, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the high-priority start port, the continuous advance notice effect is quite finished. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is applied to this variable effect. Is not started, so it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 13).
(See), the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, which is subtracted in accordance with the setting of the fluctuation pattern command by the fluctuation start processing (S307), is the main value (see S305 in FIG. 13). A hold ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the fluctuation pattern command. It may be sent. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the number of reserved balls (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command may be extracted and set to the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning and passing through the through gate 67 to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, for winning a prize in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4." It may be any number other than. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is set as a numerical value or a region divided into four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved balls may be displayed by the light emitting member. It may be configured to notify the number.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontal. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by bonuses (features) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and is equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (the symbols are aligned on the valid line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations during the bonus game period, and the winning combination during the AT period. You may manage the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio by counting the number of winning combinations.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown. In addition, each of the concepts of various inventions shown below is a part or a plurality of configurations having a concept of another invention by adding a part or a plurality of parts to the concept of the invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging with a portion or the like.

(Problem 1)
The following gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 From L5, from M1 to M6, from N1 to N5, and O1 are made to solve the following problems.

That is, conventionally, when a gaming medium is launched by a launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings and the gaming medium wins a prize in any of the winning openings, the winning openings are predetermined. There are gaming machines in which a number of gaming media are paid out to the players. In addition, some of the winning openings are provided with an accessory, and the operation of the accessory affects the winning of the game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

By the way, among the fraudulent actors, the character is provided by illegally operating the character in the prize opening provided with the character, or inducing the winning opening to win a prize in the game medium. There are those who try to increase the winnings to the winning openings. However, the response to discover such fraudulent activity is insufficient.

This technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent acts.

(Means and effects 1)
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game, and
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Withdrawal means to pay out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Memory control means to make
A gaming machine A1 comprising: an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. To. Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in connection with the winning to the winning slot based on the output signal, is due to the first winning slot (that is, the operation of the bonus). It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the characters.

In the gaming machine A1
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launching means have won a prize in any of the winning openings, payment is made based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. It has a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means, and has a main control means for performing main control of the game.
A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launching means have won a prize in either of the winning openings, the payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. It has a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, and is the first to the main control means in which the main control of the game is performed, with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. A storage means for accumulating and storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening, a storage control means for accumulating the information and storing it in the storage means, and a storage means. An output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is provided. As a result, the winning detection to the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the payout number of the game media based on the detection, and the number of the game media paid out by the payout means based on the set payout number. The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the storage means and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means are all the main controls. It can be done by means. Therefore, even if the fraudster tries to output fraudulent information from the output means to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio, the above configuration is completed by the main control means, so that the fraudulent information Is difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that the output of fraudulent information by the fraudster can prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio from being hindered.

In the gaming machine A2
The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the main control means is housed in a substrate box in which a box pace and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2. That is, since the main control means is housed in the board box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are unopenably connected, the fraudster can give fraudulent information to the output means. Is output to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the bonus ratio, but it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the hindrance of the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio due to the output of fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to 3,
External device connection means that can be connected to external devices,
An external device connection detecting means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connecting means is provided.
The output means is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means for the external device, triggered by the detection that the external device is connected by the external device connection detection means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by outputting a signal.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to 3, the following effects are played. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connecting means, it is detected by the external device connecting means, and the detection triggers a signal to the external device based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Is output by the output means. As a result, simply by connecting the external device to the external device connecting means of the gaming machine, the payout is made to the external device based on the winning of the first winning opening for the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. Since a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media played is output from the game machine, there is an effect that fraudulent acts based on the character ratio can be detected quickly and easily.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to 4,
The output means has a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening. A gaming machine A5 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to 4, the following effects are played. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening are output means. Output by. As a result, even if the one that receives the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of gaming media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine There is an effect that the accessory ratio can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. The game is characterized in that information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the player is stored in the storage means. Machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to 5, the following effects are played. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine A6
The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information on winning the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. It has the effect of being able to determine the presence or absence.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7
The first winning opening includes a second winning opening having an accessory that operates continuously based on a game.
The storage control means obtains information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Accumulate and memorize in storage means,
The output means is the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number and information related to the ratio of the number of the gaming media paid out based on the winning to the second winning opening to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means. A game machine A8 characterized by outputting and.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, the first winning opening provided in the game area includes the second winning opening having a character that operates continuously based on the game, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is increased. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning opening is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Then, with information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the storage means. , Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is output. As a result, the ratio of the number of game media paid out in connection with the winning of the winning opening, which receives the signal output from the output means, is due to the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the accessory). It is possible to analyze not only the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the second winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated), but also the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio. There is an effect that fraudulent activity can be detected more accurately based on the ratio of continuous characters.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launching means have won a prize in any of the winning openings, payment is made based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. It has a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means, and has a main control means for performing main control of the game.
The main control means has a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing a main control of the game.
At least, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by executing a calculation by the calculation means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, when the winning detection means and the winning detection means detect that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, the game medium is paid out based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. The main control means, which has a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, and in which the main control of the game is performed, is an operation for executing an operation for performing the main control of the game. Means are provided. Then, at least, the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the prize detection means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means, is paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening. The generation of information related to the ratio of the number of game media played and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by executing the calculation by the calculation means. As a result, the number of winnings to the winning opening by the winning detection means is detected, the number of game media to be paid out is set based on the detection, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is set based on the set number of payouts. 1 The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the winning opening to the storage means by the storage control means, and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means. All can be done by the arithmetic unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if the fraudster tries to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, it becomes difficult to input the fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that the output of fraudulent information by the fraudster can more reliably suppress the hindrance of the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the bonus ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8
Equipped with a main control means that performs the main control of the game,
The main control means includes a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing a main control of the game.
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launching means have won a prize in any of the winning openings, payment is made based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. The payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means is realized by executing the calculation by the calculation means.
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the storage control means and the output means are provided on a microchip different from the effect means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means that executes the calculation for performing the control, and either the winning detection means or the game medium launched by the launching means is provided. When the winning opening is detected by the winning detection means, the number of game media to be paid out is set based on the winning opening of the game medium, and the payout number setting means is notified to the payout means. , It is realized by executing the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, a storage control that accumulates and stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a microchip different from the arithmetic means. As a result, the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be obtained without significantly rewriting the operation instruction (program) executed by the calculation means simply by providing another microchip. There is an effect that a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning can be output. Further, in order to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, the calculation means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in the above, and it is possible to allocate most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means to the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine B1
The gaming machine B2, wherein the microchip is provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the effect means is provided in the main control means. Thereby, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts. Storage in the storage means and output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means are performed in the main control means. Therefore, even if the fraudster tries to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, the above configuration is completed by the main control means, so that the fraudulent act is fraudulent. It is difficult to enter various information. Therefore, there is an effect that the output of fraudulent information by the fraudster can prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio from being hindered.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2
The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the main control means and the microchip are housed in the board box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are unopenably connected, the fraudster can send the output means to the output means. Even if an attempt is made to output fraudulent information to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the role ratio, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the hindrance of the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the accessory ratio due to the output of fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3
The main control means
Each winning opening is provided with a payout information storage means for storing information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding winning opening.
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when the power is turned on to the main control means.
In the start-up process, based on the memory of the payout information storage means, information indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening is provided to each winning opening. The gaming machine B4 comprising a process for transmitting to the microchip.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, in the main control means, information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening is stored in the payout information storage means. In the calculation means, the start-up process is executed when the power is turned on to the main control means, and in the start-up process, the corresponding winning openings are used for each winning opening based on the memory of the payout information storage means. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize is transmitted to the microchip. As a result, even if the information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for the winning of each winning opening, which is different for each model of the gaming machine, is not stored in the microchip in advance, the microchip is mainly controlled when the power is turned on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, the bonus ratio is calculated, or a signal based on the information is output, and the bonus ratio is calculated with respect to the signal output from the output means. It has the effect of being able to calculate.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4
The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the microchip includes a second calculation means for performing a calculation for realizing the storage control means and the output means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the microchip is provided with a second calculation means, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the calculation of the second calculation means. .. As a result, by changing the operation command (program) of the second effect means, there is an effect that it is possible to flexibly respond to the function change and the specification change of the storage control means, the output means, and the like.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the microchip realizes the storage control means and the output means by wired logic.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are played. That is, the microchip stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means by the wired logic. A storage control means for accumulating and storing information in the storage means and an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized. As a result, processing such as storage and output of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. Has the effect of being able to do it at high speed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6,
The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means stored in the storage means is It is retained even when the power is turned off. As a result, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the gaming medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means over a long period of time. Information related to the ratio of the numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, the signal output from the output means can be analyzed for the role ratio of the gaming machine over a long period of time, so that there is an effect that past fraudulent acts can be detected.

In the gaming machine C1
A second storage means that cannot retain information while the power is turned off,
A second storage control means for storing information about a prize detected by the prize detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. The game is characterized in that information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the player is stored in the storage means. Machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. The second storage means cannot retain information while the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is passed, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. In addition, the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off, and generally requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time for writing, and is durable. Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of sex, by configuring as described above, the number of times of writing to the storage means can be reduced, and the above-mentioned problem of the storage means can be suppressed from becoming apparent.

In the gaming machine C2
The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information on winning the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. It has the effect of being able to determine the presence or absence.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
The storage control means is used as information related to the ratio of the number of the gaming media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that information indicating a prize detected by a prize detecting means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the storage means by the storage control means. , Information indicating a winning opening for which a winning is detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. Then, a signal based on this information is output. Those who received the signal output from the output means are based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the prize in the first prize opening, based on the information indicating the winning opening in which this winning is detected. The number of game media paid out can be calculated, and the bonus ratio can be analyzed from these numbers. Then, when a suspicious change is found in the accessory ratio, the cause can be deeply investigated based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably detect fraudulent acts based on the accessory ratio.

In the game machine D1
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has passed, the storage control means pays the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means by the payout means. It is characterized in that it is accumulated and stored in the storage means as information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media issued. The gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means is based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is passed, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all the prizes is based on the prize in the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out, it can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine D2
The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information on winning the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. It has the effect of being able to determine the presence or absence.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3
The output means has a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening. A gaming machine D4 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening are output means. Output by. As a result, even if the one that receives the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of gaming media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine There is an effect that the bonus ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information about the winning prize output from.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means. Equipped with a ratio calculation means to calculate the ratio of numbers
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are played. That is, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. , Calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, the signal output by the output means does not need to be calculated, and there is an effect that the analysis of fraudulent activity can be facilitated. In addition, when the signal output by the output means is received and an attempt is made to calculate the bonus ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot in each winning slot that is set illegally or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the bonus ratio will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the bonus ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine D5
The output means has, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means. The gaming machine D6 characterized by outputting the indicated signal.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are played. That is, the first with respect to the signal indicating the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detecting means accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means calculated by the ratio calculation means. A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening is output by the output means. As a result, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (feature ratio) output from the output means, the cause is searched for from the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means, which is also output. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been missed, the first item with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening is provided.
The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating a ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. When it is determined by the judgment means that the predetermined opportunity has not passed, the first prize opening is awarded for the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the basis is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, this calculated ratio (feature ratio) is output, so that the signal output by the output means does not need to be calculated, and the analysis of fraudulent activity is performed. Has the effect of facilitating. In addition, when trying to calculate the bonus ratio by receiving the signal output by the output means, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot in each winning slot that is set illegally or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the bonus ratio will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the bonus ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are accurately calculated. It has the effect of being able to calculate the ratio. Further, since the information indicating the accessory ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed from increasing.

In the gaming machine E1
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information on winning the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. It has the effect of being able to determine the presence or absence. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means, so the information related to the winning is used. This has the effect of allowing a deeper analysis of the cause of the suspected fraudulent situation.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2
The output means has a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening. A gaming machine E3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening are output means. Output by. As a result, when there is a situation in which fraudulent activity is suspected by analyzing the bonus ratio, the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding prize opening at each winning opening is referred to. It has the effect of being able to find the cause of the situation.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media that have won a prize in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is passed to the time when the next predetermined trigger is reached is counted for each winning opening, and is counted for each winning opening. A second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means transfers the information stored in the second storage means to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that information related to the ratio of the number of the gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media that have won prizes in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined trigger is passed to the time when the next predetermined trigger is passed is counted for each winning opening by the second memory control means. Information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the information indicating the winning game medium, which is stored in the second storage means and is counted for each winning opening, is paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media played is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, the prizes detected by the prize detection means are counted by the second storage control means for each prize opening, so that the prize in the prize opening is not missed and the information stored in the second storage means is stored. It can be reflected. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is passed, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, which is stored in the second storage means to reflect all the winnings, is paid out by the payout means. As information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of, the information can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, since the storage means stores the total number of game media for each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is passed until the next predetermined opportunity is reached, the storage capacity required for the storage means is stored. It has the effect of suppressing the increase. Further, the second storage means is also necessary for the second storage means because it stores information indicating the number of game media that have won prizes in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is set to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is set. It has the effect of suppressing the increase in storage capacity.

In the game machine F1
The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning of the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. Therefore, it has the effect of being able to judge whether or not there is any fraudulent activity, including the latest winning status.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2
The output means has a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening. A gaming machine F3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening are output means. Output by. As a result, even if the one that receives the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of gaming media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine There is an effect that the bonus ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information about the winning prize output from.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means. Equipped with a ratio calculation means to calculate the ratio of numbers
The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. , Calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, the signal output from the output means does not need to be calculated, and there is an effect that the analysis of fraudulent activity can be facilitated. In addition, when the signal output from the output means is received, when trying to calculate the bonus ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot in each winning slot that is set illegally or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the bonus ratio will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the bonus ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine F4
The output means has, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means. The gaming machine F5 characterized by outputting the indicated signal.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the number of game media that have won a prize in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is passed to the time when the next predetermined trigger is passed is a signal. , A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means calculated by the ratio calculation means is the output means. Is output by. As a result, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (role ratio) output from the output means, from the time when the predetermined trigger that is output together to the time when the next predetermined trigger is set. , There is an effect that the cause can be searched from the number of game media for each winning opening.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media that have won a prize in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is passed to the time when the next predetermined trigger is reached is counted for each winning opening, and is counted for each winning opening. A second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been missed, the first item with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening is provided.
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating a ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media that have won prizes in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined trigger is passed to the time when the next predetermined trigger is passed is counted for each winning opening by the second memory control means. Information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the judgment means that the predetermined opportunity has not passed, the first prize opening is awarded for the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the basis is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, this calculated ratio (feature ratio) is output, so that the signal output by the output means does not need to be calculated, and the analysis of fraudulent activity is performed. Has the effect of facilitating. In addition, when the signal output from the output means is received, when trying to calculate the bonus ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot in each winning slot that is set illegally or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the bonus ratio will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the bonus ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus are accurately calculated. It has the effect of being able to calculate the ratio. Further, since the information indicating the accessory ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced, and there is an effect that the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed from increasing. Further, the second storage means is also necessary for the second storage means because it stores information indicating the number of game media that have won prizes in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is set to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is set. It has the effect of suppressing the increase in storage capacity.

In the gaming machine G1
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning of the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. Therefore, it has the effect of being able to judge whether or not there is any fraudulent activity, including the latest winning status. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is stored in each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is set to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is set. Since it is information indicating the number of winning game media, there is an effect that the cause of the situation suspected of being fraudulent can be analyzed more deeply by using the information.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2
The output means has a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening. A gaming machine G3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening are output means. Output by. As a result, when the signal output from the output means is analyzed and there is a situation in which fraud is suspected by analyzing the accessory ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot in each winning slot. There is an effect that the cause of the situation can be investigated by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3.
A second storage control means for storing information about a prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is passed until the next predetermined opportunity is reached.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. The game is characterized in that information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the player is stored in the storage means. Machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. .. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined trigger is passed until the next predetermined trigger is reached. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, since only the information related to the prize detected by the prize detecting means is stored in the second storage means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is set to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is set, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be stored. It has the effect of keeping it small.

In the gaming machine H1
The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information on winning the latest winning opening stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. It has the effect of being able to determine the presence or absence.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2
The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information regarding the winning, which is stored in the second storage means and is detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined trigger is passed until the next predetermined trigger is passed, is retained even when the power is turned off. As a result, when the power is turned off, it is possible to prevent the loss of information regarding the winning that is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the reliability of the output signal can be improved. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3.
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
It is equipped with a power failure detection means for detecting that the power is cut off.
The storage control means stores in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed and when it is detected by the power supply cutoff detecting means that the power supply is cut off. The gaming medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that information related to the ratio of the numbers of the above is stored in a storage means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, the following Play the effect of. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when it is detected by the power supply cutoff detecting means that the power supply is turned off, the payout means pays out based on the information regarding the winning prize detected by the winning prize detecting means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, and even if the power is turned off before the predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected and the payment is made. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, it is possible to prevent the loss of information regarding the winning that is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the game medium paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of.

In the gaming machine I1
Equipped with a power supply means that can supply power for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off.
The gaming machine I2, wherein the electric power supply means supplies the electric power to at least the storage control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Therefore, when it is detected that the power supply is cut off by the power supply cutoff detecting means, the storage control means uses the power to provide information on the winning prize detected by the winning prize detecting means stored in the second storage means. Based on this, to ensure that the storage means stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine I2
The gaming machine I3, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2. That is, power is supplied not only to the storage control means but also to the second storage means by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. From this, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the payout means is surely paid out based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media can be stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3.
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.
The storage control means has won a prize detected by the prize detecting means stored in the second storage means when the power is supplied and when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of the gaming media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means is stored as the storage means. A game machine I4 characterized by being stored in a machine.

According to the gaming machine I4, the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3. In addition, it has the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, the payout means is based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when the power is supplied and when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the storage control means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. .. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means, reflecting all the prizes, when the power is supplied and when the predetermined opportunity is reached. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information regarding the winning that is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage means after the power is supplied. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the second storage means from being lost. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect. Further, when it is detected that the power is turned off, if the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, the electric power is stored in the middle of the storage of the information in the storage means. There is a possibility that the supply may be interrupted and all the information stored in the second storage means may not be reflected and the information may not be stored in the storage means, or strange information may be stored in the storage means. Is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, so that there is an effect that such a problem can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4.
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means is stored in the storage means.
The predetermined opportunity is the gaming machine J1 characterized in that the number of gaming media launched into the gaming area has reached a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine J1, the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4. In addition, it has the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the number of game media launched into the game area has reached a predetermined number, the game medium paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game medium is launched. It is possible to calculate the ratio (combination ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number. Therefore, since many game media can win the prizes in various winning openings and calculate the bonus ratio at the stage when the payout is performed, the averaged bonus ratio can be calculated. Therefore, since it is possible to eliminate the fluctuation of the bonus ratio in a short time in a normal game, it is possible to more easily analyze the fraudulent activity in the signal output by the output means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1.
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means is stored in the storage means.
The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined opportunity includes the fact that the current time has reached a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J2, any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1. In addition to the effects it plays, it has the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. In addition, since the predetermined opportunity includes the fact that the current time has reached the predetermined time, the player is surely paid out by the payout means by the arrival of the predetermined time even in the situation where the game is not performed. It is possible to calculate the ratio (role ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media. Therefore, there is an effect that the presence or absence of fraudulent activity can be reliably analyzed for the signal output from the output means by the reliably calculated bonus ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 and J2.
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means is stored in the storage means.
The predetermined opportunity is the gaming machine J3 characterized in that the cumulative time during which the game is played has reached the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J3, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 and J2. In addition to the effect played by Kagami, the following effects are played. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. In addition, the predetermined opportunity includes that the cumulative time during which the game has been played has reached the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (role ratio) is essentially that of the game ball. It is calculated by conducting a test firing test for 10 hours. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is triggered by the game time becoming a predetermined time. By storing it in the storage means, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio that is close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the signal output from the output means can be analyzed by using the accessory ratio close to the original definition.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3.
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means is stored in the storage means.
The predetermined opportunity is the gaming machine J4, characterized in that the cumulative time during which the power is supplied has reached the second predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J3. In addition to the effect played by Kagami, the following effects are played.

That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it. In addition, since the cumulative time when the power is supplied becomes the second predetermined time in the predetermined opportunity, the time when the power is supplied is the second even in the situation where the game is not played much. By the predetermined time of 2, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (role ratio) ) Can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that the presence or absence of fraudulent activity can be reliably analyzed for the signal output from the output means by the reliably calculated bonus ratio. , B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4.
Equipped with a main control means that performs the main control of the game,
The main control means includes a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing a main control of the game.
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launching means have won a prize in any of the winning openings, payment is made based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. The payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means is realized by executing the calculation by the calculation means.
The storage control means and the output means are provided on a microchip different from the effect means.
The microchip is
A second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, and a second storage control means.
Equipped with a judgment means to judge that a predetermined opportunity has passed,
The storage control means is the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has passed. Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means is stored in the storage means.
The main control means
A predetermined trigger information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger is provided.
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when the power is turned on to the main control means.
The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

According to the gaming machine J5, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J4. In addition to the effect played by Kagami, the following effects are played. That is, the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means that executes the calculation for performing the control, and either the winning detection means or the game medium launched by the launching means is provided. When the winning opening is detected by the winning detection means, the number of game media to be paid out is set based on the winning opening of the game medium, and the payout number setting means is notified to the payout means. , It is realized by executing the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, a storage control that accumulates and stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a microchip different from the arithmetic means. As a result, the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be obtained without significantly rewriting the operation instruction (program) executed by the calculation means simply by providing another microchip. There is an effect that a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning can be output.

Further, in order to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, the calculation means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in the above, and it is possible to allocate most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means to the main control of the game. Further, in the microchip, the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has passed, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the winning in the winning opening in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all the prizes are reflected, and the prize is awarded to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the above can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to do it.

On the other hand, in the main control means, the predetermined trigger is stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. Then, in the calculation means, the start-up process is executed when the power is turned on to the main control means, and in the start-up process, a predetermined trigger is set based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. The information shown is transmitted to the microchip. Here, the memory of the information regarding the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (feature ratio) is the bonus. Since there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information related to the ratio, the microchip does not fix the opportunity for that storage, but considers the jackpot probability and probability variation rate in the gaming machine. It is preferable that it is the one that has been used. Therefore, the main control means stores the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means, and each time the power is turned on, the information indicating the predetermined trigger is transmitted to the microchip. The ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning to the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability and probability variation rate in the machine ( There is an effect that information on the accessory ratio) can be stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5.
A third storage control means for accumulating information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and storing it in the third storage means is provided.
The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the output means outputs information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J5. In addition to the effect of the sword, there are the following effects. That is, the third storage control means accumulates information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and stores it in the third storage means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. As a result, the person who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the gaming state of the gaming machine and find the cause when the situation is suspected to be fraudulent.

In the game machine K1
A door frame covering the front surface of the game area is provided.
The gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is open.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, there are the following effects. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the state in which the door frame covering the front surface of the gaming area is open, the signal output from the output means is received. There is an effect that it is possible to judge whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the occurrence situation of the state where the door frame is open.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2
The gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines K1 or K2, there are the following effects. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, the one receiving the signal output from the output means is the occurrence status of the error state of the gaming machine. Therefore, it has the effect of being able to determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3
The gaming machine K4, characterized in that the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a hit state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there are the following effects. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the hit state in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value, the signal output from the output means is received. It has the effect of being able to determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity based on the occurrence of the hit state of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means is characterized by including a state in which it is detected by the winning detection means that a winning slot has been won in any of the winning openings within a predetermined time. The gaming machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, there are the following effects. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected by the winning detecting means that any winning opening has won a prize within a predetermined time. Therefore, whether or not the signal output from the output means may have been cheated based on whether or not the signal output from the output means includes a state in which a prize has been won outside business hours such as midnight hours. It has the effect of being able to judge.

It is a gaming machine that is equipped with a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game, and
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Withdrawal means to pay out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Memory control means to make
An output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and
A changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, and
The gaming machine L1 is provided with an erasing means for erasing all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine L1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. To. Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in connection with the winning to the winning slot based on the output signal, is due to the first winning slot (that is, the operation of the bonus). It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that gives the player an advantageous game value, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased. Will erase everything. Here, if the probability of winning is changed, the bonus ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the accessory ratio that can be analyzed based on the accumulated and stored information is the change. It is unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraudulent activity. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, so that the effect of the change in the bonus ratio due to the change of the probability of winning. It has the effect of eliminating the fact that it remains in the memory means.

In the gaming machine L1
The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. This has the effect that the information stored in the storage means can be grasped at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of hitting, and can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there is fraud. There is.

In the gaming machine L2
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change is made in the storage means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of hitting, and the change has been made (that is, the erase has been made). Since the date and time can also be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there was fraud.

In the gaming machine L2 or L3
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine L4 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L2 or L3, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of hitting, and it is also possible to grasp the probability of winning after the change. It has the effect of being able to more reliably determine whether or not there was fraud while suppressing the probability of a later hit.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with the information indicating the probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L2 to L4, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning before the change. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of hitting, and it is also possible to grasp the probability of hitting before the change. It has the effect of being able to more reliably determine whether or not there was fraud while suppressing the probability of a previous hit.

It is a gaming machine that is equipped with a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game, and
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Withdrawal means to pay out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Memory control means to make
An output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and
It is provided with a changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means.
The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is continuously retained even when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine M1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. To. Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in connection with the winning to the winning slot based on the output signal, is due to the first winning slot (that is, the operation of the bonus). It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that gives the player an advantageous game value, all the information stored in the storage means is retained even if the winning probability is changed by the changing means. continue. As a result, the bonus ratio changes with the change of the winning probability, but there is an effect that it is possible to analyze whether or not there is fraud before the winning probability is changed.

In the gaming machine M1
The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. This has the effect that it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and it can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine M2
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change is made in the storage means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. Will be done. This makes it easy to grasp the date and time when the winning probability was changed, so if the accessory ratio changes after that, it may be due to the change in the winning probability. It has the effect of being easy to judge at times.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2 or M3, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. Will be done. As a result, since the probability of winning after the change can be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is fraud while suppressing the probability of winning after the change.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with the information indicating the probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine M5 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M2 to M4, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning before the change. Will be done. As a result, since the probability of hitting before the change can be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is fraud while suppressing the probability of hitting before the change.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5
A display means for displaying information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means is provided.
The M6 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based only on the information stored after the change.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M1 to M5, there are the following effects. That is, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the information related to the bonus ratio is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. As a result, with respect to the information related to the bonus ratio displayed on this display means, it is possible to eliminate the change in the bonus ratio due to the change in the winning probability, and it is possible to easily detect the fraudulent activity after the change in the winning probability. effective.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6
The gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the storage control means divides the information into each of the probabilities that can be set by the change by the changing means, and accumulates and stores the information in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M1 to M6, there are the following effects. That is, the information stored in the storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by dividing it into hit probabilities that can be set by the change by the changing means. Thereby, for each probability that can be set, the accessory ratio when the probability is set can be easily determined from the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the bonus ratio due to the change in the probability of winning and the change in the bonus ratio due to fraudulent activity can be clearly switched and analyzed.

It is a gaming machine that is equipped with a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game, and
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Withdrawal means to pay out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Memory control means to make
An output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and
A changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, and
It is characterized by comprising an erasing means for erasing the information accumulated and stored in the storage means except for a part of the most recently stored information when the probability is changed by the changing means. Game machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. To. Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in connection with the winning to the winning slot based on the output signal, is due to the first winning slot (that is, the operation of the bonus). It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that gives the player an advantageous game value, if the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means will be the latest. It is erased by the erasing means except for a part of the stored information. Here, if the probability of winning is changed, the bonus ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the accessory ratio that can be analyzed based on the accumulated and stored information is the change. It is unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraudulent activity. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased except for the part stored most recently, which changes the probability of winning. Therefore, while it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effect of the change in the accessory ratio from remaining in the storage means, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity before the probability of winning is changed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine N1
The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability that the information stored in the storage means has changed has changed. It has the effect that it can be grasped at the analysis stage that it has been erased and can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there was fraud.

In the gaming machine N2
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change is made in the storage means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. A gaming machine N3 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability that the information stored in the storage means has changed has changed. Since it is possible to grasp the fact that the deletion has been made at the analysis stage, and also the date and time when the change was made (that is, the deletion was made), it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there was fraud. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine N4 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N2 or N3, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability that the information stored in the storage means has changed has changed. Since it is possible to grasp the fact that it has been erased at the analysis stage, and also to grasp the probability of hitting after the change, it is possible to more reliably judge whether or not there was fraud while suppressing the probability of hitting after the change. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines N2 to N4
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores the information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with the information indicating the probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine N5 characterized by being made to.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines N2 to N4, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning before the change. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability that the information stored in the storage means has changed has changed. Since it is possible to grasp the fact that it has been erased at the analysis stage, and also to grasp the probability of hitting before the change, it is possible to more reliably judge whether or not there was fraud while suppressing the probability of hitting before the change. It has the effect of being able to do it.

It is a gaming machine that is equipped with a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and gives an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game, and
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Withdrawal means to pay out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Memory control means to make
An output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and
A display means for displaying information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means, and a display means.
A mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, and
A means for displaying a value indicating the probability of the hit to be changed on the display means when the mode is switched to the mode to be changed by the mode switching means.
It is characterized by comprising a setting means for setting the probability of the hit to be changed displayed on the display means as the probability of the hit at the stage when the mode for changing the probability of hit is completed. Game machine O1.

According to the gaming machine O1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. To. Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, the bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in connection with the winning to the winning slot based on the output signal, is due to the first winning slot (that is, the operation of the bonus). It has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the characters. In addition, since the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means, it is easy to see whether or not the fraudulent act has been performed by looking at the display of the display means. It has the effect of being able to judge. On the other hand, when the mode switching means is switched to the mode in which the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means is changed, the display means displays a value indicating the probability of winning to be changed. Then, at the stage when the mode for changing the probability of winning is completed, the probability of winning to be changed displayed on the display means is set as the probability of winning by the setting means. Thereby, the display means for displaying the information related to the accessory ratio can also be used as the display means for displaying the probability of winning to be changed when the probability of winning is changed. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in the number of display means mounted on the gaming machine.

(Problem 2)
The following gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, and U2 are designed to solve the following problems.

That is, the RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means for controlling the game is used as a first storage area used for the process of performing the main control of the game and a second storage area used for other processes. There are known gaming machines that are divided and configured to protect information used in the main control of the game from being destroyed by other processing (eg, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

On the other hand, there is a need for more appropriate protection from other processes for the information used in the processes that perform the main control of the game.

The present technical idea is made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably protecting information used in the main control of a game.

(Means and effects 2)
In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic and
With multiple registers
A first storage means for readable and writable storage of the first information used when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the calculation means.
A second storage means that literately stores second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means. When,
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means is stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process using information, a save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, and a save means.
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the information, the return means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register. A game machine P1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine P1, a main control means for controlling the gaming is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and writable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It will be remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means by the save instruction by the load instruction or the store instruction. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding register by the return means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processes with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. Further, since the contents of the register are saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means by the load instruction or the store instruction, the saved place is fixed in the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving in the stack area. be able to. Therefore, the register used in the first process is used by constructing a program so as to clearly avoid a predetermined area in which the contents of the register are saved and use the second storage means during the second process. You can surely protect the contents of. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine P1
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the instruction to the arithmetic means.
The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the evacuation means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the calculation means and a work area for storing information used based on the calculation to the calculation means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the stack area and secure a large capacity for the work area.

In the gaming machine P2
The calculation means is
A stack area designation means for designating the range of the stack area in advance, and
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area designation means, at least the storage clear that clears all the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area. A gaming machine P3 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the gaming machine P3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2. That is, the arithmetic means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clearing means. Here, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the save means. Therefore, the evacuation has the effect of suppressing the stacking of information beyond the specified range in the stack area, and thus suppressing the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage means is cleared. be.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3
The gaming machine P4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are played. That is, the stage in which the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing executes the first processing by using the first information stored in the first storage means by the arithmetic means. When the arithmetic means shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means saves the second information to a predetermined area of the second storage means. .. As a result, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the second process is executed, based on the content saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. ..

According to the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing performs the arithmetic from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means saves the means to a predetermined area of the second storage means. This has the effect of saving only the minimum necessary registers to a predetermined area and reliably restoring the contents immediately before executing the second process.

In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic and
With multiple registers
A first storage means for readable and writable storage of the first information used when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the calculation means.
A second storage means that literately stores second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means. When,
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means is stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process using information, a save means for saving the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means, and a save means.
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the information, the return means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register. A game machine Q1 characterized by being prepared.

According to the gaming machine Q1, a main control means for controlling the gaming is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and writable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It will be remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved by the save means to a predetermined area of the second storage means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding register by the return means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processes with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. Further, since only some registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low, the memory capacity can be reduced, and the like. It is possible to increase the area for storing information and the like. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine Q1
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the instruction to the arithmetic means.
The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the evacuation means saves the contents of a part of the registers to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the calculation means and a work area for storing information used based on the calculation to the calculation means. The contents of some of the registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the stack area and secure a large capacity for the work area.

In the gaming machine Q2
The calculation means is
A stack area designation means for designating the range of the stack area in advance, and
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area designation means, at least the storage clear that clears all the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having means and means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2. That is, the arithmetic means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clearing means. Here, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some registers are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the save means. Therefore, the evacuation has the effect of suppressing the stacking of information beyond the specified range in the stack area, and thus suppressing the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage means is cleared. be.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3
The gaming machine Q4, wherein the partial register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are played. That is, some registers including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing execute the first processing by using the first information stored in the first storage means by the arithmetic means. When the arithmetic means shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means moves to a predetermined area of the second storage means. It is evacuated. As a result, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the second process is executed, based on the content saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine Q4, the part of the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. Game machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a part of the register, and the arithmetic means executes the first processing by using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the arithmetic means shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means moves to a predetermined area of the second storage means. It is evacuated. This has the effect of saving only the minimum necessary registers to a predetermined area and reliably restoring the contents immediately before executing the second process.

In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic and
With multiple registers
A first storage means for readable and writable storage of the first information used when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the calculation means.
A second storage means that literately stores second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means. When,
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means is stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process using information, a save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register, and a save means.
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the information, the return means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register. A game machine R1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine R1, a main control means for controlling the gaming is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and writable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It will be remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means by the save means by an individual instruction for each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding register by the return means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processes with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. Further, since the evacuation is performed by an individual instruction for each register to a predetermined area of the second storage means, the evacuation is performed to ensure that the game process that mainly controls the game is not affected by other processes. It is possible to specify only the necessary registers individually and save them. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine R1
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the instruction to the arithmetic means.
The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the evacuation means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are played. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the calculation means and a work area for storing information used based on the calculation to the calculation means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for the stack area and secure a large capacity for the work area.

In the gaming machine R2
The calculation means is
A stack area designation means for designating the range of the stack area in advance, and
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area designation means, at least the storage clear that clears all the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area. A gaming machine R3 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the arithmetic means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clearing means. Here, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the save means. Therefore, the evacuation has the effect of suppressing the stacking of information beyond the specified range in the stack area, and thus suppressing the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage means is cleared. be.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3
The gaming machine R4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects are played. That is, the stage in which the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing executes the first processing by using the first information stored in the first storage means by the arithmetic means. When the arithmetic means shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means saves the second information to a predetermined area of the second storage means. .. As a result, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the second process is executed, based on the content saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine R4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. ..

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing performs the arithmetic from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means saves the means to a predetermined area of the second storage means. This has the effect of saving only the minimum necessary registers to a predetermined area and reliably restoring the contents immediately before executing the second process.

In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic and
With multiple registers
A first storage means for readable and writable storage of the first information used when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the calculation means.
A second storage means that literately stores the second information used when the second process relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the calculation means, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means.
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means is stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process using the information, the save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means, and the save means.
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the information, the return means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register. A game machine S1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine S1, a main control means for controlling the gaming is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and writable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second process relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the arithmetic means is literately stored in the second storage means. .. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means by the save means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding register by the return means. As a result, the information stored in this register can also be appropriately protected from the processing related to the bonus ratio with respect to the information used in the processing that mainly controls the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the game machine S1
The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load command or a store command.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine S1, there are the following effects. That is, since the contents of the register are saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means by the load instruction or the store instruction, the saved place is fixed in the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving in the stack area. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2
The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that the evacuation means saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines S1 or S2, there are the following effects. That is, since only a part of the registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low, the memory capacity can be reduced, or the like. There is an effect that the area for storing the information and the like can be enlarged.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3
The gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the evacuation means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, there are the following effects. That is, since the evacuation is performed by an individual instruction for each register to a predetermined area of the second storage means, the evacuation is performed to ensure that the game process that mainly controls the game is not affected by other processes. There is an effect that it is possible to specify only the necessary registers individually and save them.

In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic and
A first storage means for readable and writable storage of the first information used when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the calculation means.
A second storage means that literately stores second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means. When,
With a stack pointer,
The second process is executed by a program read out at a predetermined position of the first process.
The main control means
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. The gaming machine T1 is provided with a stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the stage of executing the first process using information.

According to the gaming machine T1, a main control means for controlling the gaming is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and writable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It will be remembered. Here, the second process is executed by the program read out at a predetermined position of the first process. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the stack pointer setting means sets the stack pointer to a fixed value. Since the second process is a program read at a predetermined position in the first process, the number of information stacked in the first process is always when the execution of the second process is started. It is constant. Therefore, a fixed value based on the number of stacked information can be set in the stack pointer when returning from the stage where the second process is executed to the stage where the first process is executed, and the process is executed again. In the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read out. Therefore, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When moving to the stage of executing the second process, it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process, so that the save is made. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in storage capacity. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine T1
The arithmetic means includes a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer allocation executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when a timer interrupt generated at a predetermined time is detected. It executes an interrupt process and
The gaming machine T2, wherein the first process and the second process are processes executed in the timer interrupt process.

According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1. That is, the main process, the loop process executed in the main process, and the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when a timer interrupt generated at a predetermined time is detected. , Executed by arithmetic means. Then, the first process and the second process are executed in the timer interrupt process. As a result, when the program read out at a predetermined position in the first process starts the execution of the second process, the number of information stacked in the first process is always a fixed number. Therefore, a fixed value based on the fixed number is simply set in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, and the first process is executed again. In the process of, there is an effect that the stacked information can be surely read out.

In a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
An arithmetic means for performing arithmetic and
With multiple registers
A first storage means for readable and writable storage of the first information used when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the calculation means.
A second storage means that literately stores second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means. When,
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means is stored in the second storage means. A first fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when shifting to the stage of executing the second process using information.
From the stage where the calculation means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the stage of executing the first process using information.

According to the gaming machine U1, a main control means for controlling the gaming is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the calculation, the first information used for executing the first process is readable and writable. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It will be remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the fixed value is stored in a predetermined register by the first fixed value storage means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the fixed value is stored in the predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage means by the second fixed value storage means. As a result, from the stage where the calculation means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the calculation means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. From the stage of shifting to the stage of executing the second process and the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means is the first. The contents of the registers can be seemingly the same when returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first process that mainly controls the game is not affected by the second process executed between them. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine U1
The gaming machine U2, characterized in that the fixed value is 0.

According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1. That is, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. From the stage of shifting to the stage of executing the second process and the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means stores the first storage. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as a fixed value of a predetermined register. As a result, it can be grasped that this predetermined register is cleared to 0 at first glance.
(Problem 3)
The gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 shown below are made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, when a gaming medium is launched into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings by a launching means and the gaming medium wins a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are used. There are gaming machines in which gaming media are paid out to players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-3400046).

By the way, some fraudsters make it difficult for the game medium to win a prize in a predetermined winning slot, or conversely induce the game medium to easily win a prize in the predetermined winning slot. However, the response to discover such fraudulent activity was insufficient.

This technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent acts.
(Means and effects 3)
A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
A game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine, and a game performance information display means.
The gaming machine V1 is characterized by comprising a confirmation display means for confirming whether or not normal display is possible in the game performance information display means for a predetermined period of time.

According to the gaming machine V1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. For the game performance display means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not normal display is possible in the game performance display means by this confirmation display, it is possible to determine whether or not the game performance information displayed in the game performance display means is normal. As a result, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity can be determined based on the game performance information determined to be normal, so that there is an effect that the fraudulent activity can be detected suitably.

In the gaming machine V1
The game machine V2 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the power is turned on, the confirmation display means for confirming whether or not normal display is possible for the game performance display means is performed for a predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal each time the power is turned on, so that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the game performance information that is determined to be normal more accurately. There is.

In the gaming machine V1
The game machine V3 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means is displayed for a predetermined period by the confirmation display means. Will be. Thereby, if a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, it can be determined whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, when making the determination, the determination can be made by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, so that there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be detected suitably.

In the gaming machine V1
A new start-up specifying means for specifying that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period is provided.
The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the new start-up period is reached.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is specified by the specific means that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible for the gaming performance display means is the confirmation display. It is carried out by means for a predetermined period. Thereby, at least when the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, it can be determined whether or not the display of the gaming performance display means is normal. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the shipment of gaming machines that cannot normally display the gaming performance display means.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4
The gaming machine V5 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, during a predetermined period in which the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to perform the confirmation display, the game is played. Since the progress is stopped by the stopping means, the game performance display means displays the confirmation, and while the game performance information is hidden, the game progresses without being able to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity. It has the effect of suppressing this.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4
The gaming machine V6, characterized in that the progress of the gaming is continued even during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, even during a predetermined period in which the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to display the confirmation. Since the progress is continued, the confirmation display is displayed on the game performance information display means, which has the effect of suppressing the waiting for the game.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator.
The gaming machine V7 is characterized in that the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on. This has the effect that it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be normally lit, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator.
The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked. This has the effect that it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be turned on and off normally, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is paid out when the number of gaming media launched into the gaming area is 100 and the gaming state is normal. A gaming machine V9 characterized by having a base value which is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine V9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance information display means displays, as game performance information, a base value, which is the number of game media whose game state is normally paid out, while the number of game media launched into the game area is 100. Will be done. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be detected favorably.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
A game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine, and a game performance information display means.
A new start-up specifying means for specifying that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, and
When the new start-up specifying means specifies that the new start-up period is in effect, the new start-up specifying means includes a special display mode display means for displaying the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal time. The gaming machine W1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine W1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when it is specified by the new start-up specific means that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the special display mode display means displays the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal time. Will be. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the new start-up period is currently in progress from the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode, and to indicate that there is no information capable of determining fraudulent activity. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine W1
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator.
The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked.

According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. The special display mode is a display mode in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked. As a result, in the game performance information display means, there is an effect that it is possible to easily indicate that the new start-up period is in progress by turning on or blinking all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2
The game performance information display means is
It is equipped with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed for each segment indicator by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment.
Some segment indicators are used to display the game performance information, and other segment indicators are identifications for identifying the type of the game performance information displayed on some of the segment indicators. It is used to display information and
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked in the other segment display device. ..

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines W1 or W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. In addition, some segment indicators are used to display game performance information, and other segment indicators are identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some segment indicators. Is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of game performance information is lit or blinked in another segment display. As a result, when information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinking on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, the new start-up period is currently in progress. Has the effect of being able to easily indicate.

In the gaming machine W3
The game machine W4 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is turned on or blinked in some of the segment display devices.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which the game performance information indicating the game performance measured in real time is turned on or blinked on some segment displays. As a result, since the new start-up period is in progress, the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured, but there is an effect that the information indicating the gaming performance measured in real time can be shown as a reference.

The game performance information display means is
It is equipped with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed for each segment indicator by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment.
Some segment indicators are used to display the game performance information, and other segment indicators are identifications for identifying the type of the game performance information displayed on some of the segment indicators. It is used to display information and
The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is blinked and displayed on the other segment display device.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines W1 or W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. In addition, some segment indicators are used to display game performance information, and other segment indicators are identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some segment indicators. Is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of game performance information is blinked and displayed on another segment display device. As a result, when the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is blinking and displayed on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, it can be easily indicated that the new start-up period is currently in progress. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine W5
The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed on some of the segment display devices.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed on some segment displays. This has the effect of clearly showing that the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine has not been measured because the new launch period is in progress.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is paid out when the number of gaming media launched into the gaming area is 100 and the gaming state is normal. The gaming machine W7 characterized by having a base value which is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance information display means displays, as game performance information, a base value, which is the number of game media whose game state is normally paid out, while the number of game media launched into the game area is 100. Will be done. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be detected favorably.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
A game performance information acquisition means for acquiring game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine for each predetermined period, and a game performance information acquisition means.
A game performance information storage means for storing game performance information acquired by the game performance acquisition means for a plurality of predetermined periods, and a game performance information storage means.
A gaming machine X1 comprising: a gaming performance information display means for displaying game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine X1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Here, at each predetermined period, game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is acquired by the game performance information acquisition means, and the respective game performance information is the game. It is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means and acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed in the game performance information display means. As a result, since the game performance information for a plurality of predetermined periods is shown, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity, and it is possible to predict the time when the fraudulent activity has occurred to some extent. can. Therefore, there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be detected favorably.

In the gaming machine X1
The game performance acquisition means acquires game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine in real time during the predetermined period.
The game performance information storage means stores the game performance information acquired in real time.
The game performance information display means displays the game performance information acquired in real time together with the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods. A game machine X2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance acquisition means acquires game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine in real time in the middle of a predetermined period, and the game performance information acquired in real time is used as the game performance information storage means. It will be remembered. Then, the game performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the game performance information display means together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. As a result, the game performance information acquired in real time is also shown, which has the effect of making it possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine X1
The game performance information storage means is
The first storage area for storing game performance information in the previous predetermined period,
It is provided with at least a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before.
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming machine is used for the predetermined period acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means. The gaming machine X3, characterized in that the gaming performance information indicating the performance of the executed game is stored in the first storage area.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area for storing game performance information in the previous predetermined period and a second storage area for storing game performance information in the predetermined period two times before. .. Then, when the predetermined period elapses, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information is executed in the gaming machine during the predetermined period acquired by the game performance acquisition means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game is stored in the first storage area. As a result, every time a predetermined period elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means and displayed in the game performance information display means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information. To. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further determine whether or not there has been a fraudulent act based on the new game performance information.

In the gaming machine X2
The game performance information storage means is
The 0th storage area for storing the game performance information acquired in real time in real time by the game performance acquisition means by overwriting, and
The first storage area for storing game performance information in the previous predetermined period,
It is provided with at least a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before.
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area is moved to the eleventh storage area. A gaming machine X4 characterized by shifting.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information storage means stores the 0th storage area for storing the game performance information acquired in real time in real time by the game performance acquisition means by overwriting, and the game performance information in the previous predetermined period. A first storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before the previous time is provided at least. Then, when the predetermined period elapses, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the first storage area. .. As a result, every time a predetermined period elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means and displayed in the game performance information display means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information. To. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further determine whether or not there has been a fraudulent act based on the new game performance information. Further, the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area when the predetermined period elapses becomes the game performance information in the predetermined period. By shifting it to the first storage area as it is, there is an effect that the game performance information in the previous predetermined period can be easily stored in the first storage area.

In the gaming machine X3 or X4
The gaming machine X5 is provided with a shift processing means for executing a shift of gaming performance information between each storage area in the gaming performance information storage means by using an LDIR command.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X3 or X4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shift processing means shifts the game performance information between the storage areas in the game performance information storage means by the LDIR command. This has the effect that the shift process can be easily executed with one instruction.

In any of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is paid out when the number of gaming media launched into the gaming area is 100 and the gaming state is normal. A gaming machine X6 characterized by having a base value which is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the following effects are played. That is, the game performance information display means displays, as game performance information, a base value, which is the number of game media whose game state is normally paid out, while the number of game media launched into the game area is 100. Will be done. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be detected favorably.

(Problem 4)
The following gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, Ka1, Ka2, and Ki1 to Ki3 are as follows. It was done to solve the problem.

Conventionally, when a gaming medium is launched into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings by a launching means and the gaming medium wins a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are used. There are gaming machines in which gaming media are paid out to players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-3400046).

There are people who cheat on such games. However, the measures to suppress such fraudulent activities were insufficient.

The present technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing fraudulent activities.

(Means and effects 4)
A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
It is provided with a game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine and information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information.
The game performance information display means is
A first display means for displaying the game performance information or information outside the game performance information, and
A second display means for displaying identification information indicating display contents displayed on the first display means, and a second display means.
The gaming machine a1 is provided with a means for hiding the display of the second display means when the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means.

According to the gaming machine A1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display content displayed by the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Will be done. Then, when the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is information other than the game performance information by seeing that the display of the second display means is non-display.

In game machine A1
A predetermined judgment is made when the start condition is satisfied, and when the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the probability level is set as the game performance information non-game information. 2. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a display control means for displaying on a display means.

According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in a predetermined determination is changed by the changing means, the display of the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the probability level is changed as the information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is hidden. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is at the level of the probability of being changed by the change means by seeing that the display of the second display means is hidden. There is.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error history storage means that stores the history of the error type detected by the error detection means, and an error history storage means.
The error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type is provided.
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the non-game performance information information based on the memory of the error history storage means. 3. The gaming machine a3, which comprises a display control means for displaying the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detecting means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the error history display receiving means receives the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the error type history is stored as the non-game performance information information in the error history storage means. It is displayed on the game performance information display means based on. Then, when the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is the history of the error type by seeing that the display of the second display means is non-display.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3
The second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment with respect to the segment display.
The gaming machine a4, characterized in that the means for hiding the display of the second display means is for turning off all the segments of the segment display.

According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment with respect to the segment display. Then, when the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, all the segments of the segment display of the second display means are turned off, and the display of the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that the display can be performed with simple control.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4
The first display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of digits.
The gaming machine is
When displaying the non-gaming performance information on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed as the gaming performance. 3. The gaming machine a3 is provided with means for displaying information in a display mode that is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, some digits among the plurality of digits are used for the game performance. External information is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of game performance information. As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, depending on the display content of the remaining digits in the first display means. effective.

In the gaming machine A5
When displaying the game performance information on the first display means, the gaming machine a6 is provided with means for displaying the game performance information by using all of the plurality of digits.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying the game performance information on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all the plurality of digits. This has the effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6
The gaming machine a7 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information is to hide the display of the remaining digits.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying the non-game performance information on the first display means, the non-game performance information is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is hidden. .. As a result, by hiding the remaining digits, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. be.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information is a gaming machine a8 characterized in that the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. To. As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it becomes clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the remaining digits are blinking and displayed in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinking and displayed in a predetermined display mode. To. As a result, the remaining digits are blinking and displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it becomes clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
It is provided with a game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine and information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information.
The game performance information display means is
A first display means for displaying the game performance information or information outside the game performance information, and
A second display means for displaying identification information indicating display contents displayed on the first display means is provided.
The first display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of digits.
The gaming machine is
When displaying the non-gaming performance information on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed as the gaming performance. A gaming machine (a) 1.

According to the gaming machine (a) 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display content displayed by the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Will be done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, some digits out of the plurality of digits are used for the information outside the game performance. Is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information. As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits in the first display means. There is.

In the game machine A1
When displaying the game performance information on the first display means, the gaming machine a2 is provided with means for displaying the game performance information by using all of the plurality of digits.

According to the gaming machine (a) 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine (a) 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying the game performance information on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all the plurality of digits. This has the effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In game machine a1 or a2
A predetermined judgment is made when the start condition is satisfied, and when the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the probability level is set as the game performance information non-game information. 3. The gaming machine a3, which comprises a display control means for displaying on the display means.

According to the gaming machine a3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines a1 or a2. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in a predetermined determination is changed by the changing means, the display of the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the probability level is changed as the information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. When displaying the probability level on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is displayed in the display of the game performance information. It is done in a display mode that is not displayed. This has the effect that it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or a probability level based on the display content of the remaining digits in the first display means. be.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a3
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error history storage means that stores the history of the error type detected by the error detection means, and an error history storage means.
The error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type is provided.
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the non-game performance information information based on the memory of the error history storage means. 4. The gaming machine a4, which is provided with a display control means for displaying the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine a4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines a1 to a3. That is, when an error is detected by the error detecting means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the error history display receiving means receives the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the error type history is stored as the non-game performance information information in the error history storage means. It is displayed on the game performance information display means based on. When displaying the history of the error type on the first display means, the history of the error type is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is the display of the game performance information. It is performed in a display mode that is not displayed in. As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the history of the error type, based on the display content of the remaining digits in the first display means. There is.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the display of the remaining digits is hidden.

According to the gaming machine (a) 5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines (a) 1 to (a) 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying the non-game performance information on the first display means, the non-game performance information is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is hidden. .. As a result, by hiding the remaining digits, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. be.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine a6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines a1 to a4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. To. As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it becomes clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the remaining digits are blinking and displayed in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine a7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines a1 to a4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinking and displayed in a predetermined display mode. To. As a result, the remaining digits are blinking and displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it becomes clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
It is provided with a game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the game machine and information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information.
The game performance information display means is
A first display means for displaying the game performance information or information outside the game performance information, and
A second display means for displaying identification information indicating display contents displayed on the first display means, and a second display means.
When the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the first display means displays the game performance information. A gaming machine c 1. characterized by providing means and means.

According to the gaming machine c1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display content displayed by the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Will be done. Then, when the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the first display means displays the game performance information. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information by looking at the display of the second display means.

In the game machine c1
A predetermined judgment is made when the start condition is satisfied, and when the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the probability level is set as the game performance information non-game information. 2. A gaming machine c that includes a display control means for displaying on a display means.

According to the gaming machine c2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine c1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in a predetermined determination is changed by the changing means, the display of the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the probability level is changed as the information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, by looking at the display of the second display means, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or the level of probability of being changed by the change means. effective.

In the gaming machine c1 or c2
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error history storage means that stores the history of the error type detected by the error detection means, and an error history storage means.
The error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type is provided.
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the non-game performance information information based on the memory of the error history storage means. 3. The gaming machine c is provided with a display control means for displaying the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine c3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines c1 or c2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detecting means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the error history display receiving means receives the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the error type history is stored as the non-game performance information information in the error history storage means. It is displayed on the game performance information display means based on. Then, when the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the history of the error type by looking at the display of the second display means.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c3
When the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the first display means displays the game performance information. The gaming machine c4 is characterized in that the display of the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine c4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines c1 to c3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, the display of the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c3
When the information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the first display means displays the game performance information. The gaming machine c5 is characterized in that the display of the second display means is blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine c5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines c1 to c3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when displaying information outside the game performance on the first display means, the display of the second display means blinks in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the gaming medium. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out media,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error history storage means that stores the history of the error type detected by the error detection means, and an error history storage means.
An error history display receiving means that accepts the display of the error type history, and
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. A gaming machine d. 1 characterized by comprising a display control means for displaying on.

According to the gaming machine D1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. When an error is detected by the error detecting means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Then, when the error history display receiving means receives the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the error type history is the game performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. It is displayed in the display means. As a result, one game performance information display means can display the history of the error type, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the history of the error type.

In the game machine D1
2. The display control means is characterized in that when an error is detected by the error detection means, the display control means continues to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an error is detected by the error detecting means, the display control means continues to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means. Therefore, even if the fraudster intentionally causes some kind of error, there is an effect that the fraudulent activity can be reliably detected from the game performance information that is continuously displayed on the game performance information display means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
When the reception of the history display by the error history display receiving means is completed, the display control means switches the game performance information display means and displays the game performance information on the game performance information display means. A game machine d 3. characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the reception of the error type history display by the error history display receiving means is completed, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the game performance information is displayed again in the game performance information display means. To. As a result, even if the history of the error type is once displayed on the game performance information display means, the game performance information can be displayed again, so that the fraudulent activity can be reliably detected from the game performance information. It has the effect of being able to do it.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A storage means for storing information related to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and a storage means.
An output means that outputs information about game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means, and an output means.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the information related to the game performance information affected by the probability is deleted from the information stored in the storage means, and the game performance information not affected by the probability is related. A gaming machine O1 characterized by comprising a memory control means for holding information.

According to the gaming machine O1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the information regarding the game performance information output from the output means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in a predetermined determination is changed by the changing means, the storage control means erases the information related to the game performance information affected by the probability among the information stored in the storage means. And the information about the game performance information that is not affected by the probability is retained. Therefore, as for the information related to the game performance information affected by the probability, the information related to the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that the game performance information with high accuracy can be output. On the other hand, since the information related to the game performance information that is not affected by the probability is retained in the storage means, even if the fraudster changes the probability in order to conceal the erasure of the fraudulent activity, the information is retained in the storage means. There is an effect that fraudulent activity can be reliably detected based on the game performance information obtained.

In the game machine O1
The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the information regarding the gaming performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means, so that the probability is changed by the changing means. In this case, by erasing the predetermined areas of the storage means collectively, there is an effect that the information related to the game performance information, which is affected by the probability, can be easily erased.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A storage means for storing information related to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and a storage means.
An output means that outputs information related to game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means, and an output means.
When the determination is not a predetermined result, a specific determination means for determining whether or not the determination is a specific result, and
When the determination is determined to be the specific result by the specific determination means, the opening means for opening the normally closed winning opening for a predetermined time without imparting the predetermined game value.
A changing means for changing the probability of the particular result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels.
The gaming machine K1 is provided with a storage control means for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine Ka 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. This has the effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the information regarding the game performance information output from the output means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the determination is made. If the result is not a predetermined result, it is determined by the specific determination means whether or not the determination is a specific result. When the determination is determined to be a specific result by the specific determination means, a predetermined game value is not given, and one normally closed winning opening is opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. If the game medium wins in this open winning opening, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. In addition, the probability of producing a specific result in a predetermined determination is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, as for the information related to the game performance information, the information related to the game performance information is stored in the storage means at a newly set probability, so that there is an effect that accurate game performance information can be output.

In the gaming machine Ka 1
The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming performance information is a base value.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine 1, the gaming performance information is a base value, so that the information about the base value is the information about the gaming performance information at the newly set probability. Since it is stored in the storage means, it has the effect of being able to output an accurate base value.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A display means for displaying the level of the probability is provided.
The gaming machine key 1 is characterized in that the display of the probability level in the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine Ki 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. The level of probability is displayed in the display means. The display of the probability level in this display means is performed only when the power is turned on. As a result, the probability level set for the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, so it is difficult for the player to know the probability level set for the gaming machine, and it is preferable to suppress fraudulent activities. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine Ki 1
The gaming machine key 2 is characterized in that the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine key 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine key 1, the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, so unless the door of the gaming machine is opened and the back side of the gaming machine is exposed. , The level of probability displayed on the display means cannot be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is more difficult for the player to know the level of probability set in the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine Ki 2
A door opening detecting means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine has been unlocked and opened is provided.
The display of the probability level in the display means is performed on condition that the door opening is detected by the door opening detecting means at least when the power is turned on. ..

According to the gaming machine Ki 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Ki 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is detected by the door opening detecting means that the door of the locked gaming machine is unlocked and opened. Then, the display of the probability level in the display means is performed on condition that the door opening is detected at least by the door opening detecting means when the power is turned on. Since the door is normally unlocked by a key managed by the hall side, it has the effect of making it more difficult for the player to know the level of probability set in the gaming machine.

(Problem 5)
The following gaming machines K1 to K3, K1 to K6, K1 to K5, Sa1, Sa2, Shi1, Shi2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, So1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, and To 2 are made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, when a gaming medium is launched into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings by a launching means and the gaming medium wins a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are used. There are gaming machines in which gaming media are paid out to players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-3400046).

There is a desire to change the probability of winning for such a game. However, the measures to change the probability of such a hit were insufficient.

The present technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

(Means and effects 5)
A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A storage means that stores information used to control the game and can retain the information even when the power is turned off.
The information erasing instruction means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage means, and the information erasing instruction means.
A permitting means that permits the change or confirmation of the level of probability by being put into a predetermined state.
When the permission means is put into a predetermined state and the power is turned on with the information erasure instruction means instructing to erase the information, the first change means enables the change of the probability level. The first mode start-up means to start up in the mode,
When the permission means is put into a predetermined state and the power is turned on without the information erasure instruction means instructing the erasure of the information, the second mode is activated so that the probability level can be confirmed. When the power is turned on with the two-mode start-up means and the permission means not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has been instructed to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is stored. 3rd mode start-up means to start up in the 3rd mode to erase,
When the power is turned on when the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means does not instruct to erase the information, the fourth mode is set up in the fourth mode in which the normal start-up is performed. A game machine 1 characterized by being provided with the above means.

According to the gaming machine Ku 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Further, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information can be retained even while the power is turned off. Information erasure instruction means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage means, and permission means for changing the level of probability or permitting the probability by setting a predetermined state are provided. Then, when the permission means is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on with the information erasure instruction means instructing to erase the information, the first mode start-up means changes the probability level by the change means. It is launched in the first mode that enables it. Further, when the permission means is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on without the information erasure instruction means instructing to erase the information, the second mode start-up means enables the confirmation of the probability level. It can be launched in 2 modes. Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means is instructed to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is stored by the third mode start-up means. It is started up in the third mode to erase. Further, when the power is turned on without the permission means being in the predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means not instructing to erase the information, the fourth mode start-up means performs the normal start-up. It is launched at. This has the effect that the start-up mode can be set in an easy-to-understand manner, including a mode in which the probability level can be changed or confirmed by combining the operation of the information erasure instruction means and the permission means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine Ku 1
A door opening detecting means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine has been unlocked and opened is provided.
In the first mode start-up means, it was detected that the door was opened by the door opening detecting means, the permission means was put into a predetermined state, and the information erasing instruction means instructed to erase the information. When the power is turned on in the state, it is started up in the first mode that enables the change of the probability level by the change means.
In the second mode start-up means, it is detected that the door is opened by the door opening detecting means, the permission means is put into a predetermined state, and the information erasing instruction means does not instruct to erase the information. The gaming machine door 2 is characterized in that it is started up in a second mode that enables confirmation of the probability level when the power is turned on in the state.

(Action effect)
According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1. That is, when it is detected by the door opening detecting means that the door is opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the power is turned on with the information erasing instruction means instructing to erase the information, the first step is made. The one-mode start-up means is started up in the first mode, which enables the change means to change the probability level. Further, when it is detected by the door opening detecting means that the door is opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the power is turned on without the information erasing instruction by the information erasing instruction means, the second is performed. By the mode start-up means, it is started up in the second mode which enables confirmation of the probability level. As a result, since the change or confirmation of the probability level is not performed unless the door is opened, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

In the game machine Ku 1 or Ku 2.
3. The gaming machine K3, wherein the permission means is composed of a key, and the predetermined state is a state rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, the permission means is composed of a key, and the predetermined state is a state rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or starting up in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position by the key. Since the key is managed by the hall side, there is an effect that it can be difficult for the player to change or confirm the level of probability.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A confirmation means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives, and
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing when it is confirmed by the confirmation means that the level of the probability is not normal.

According to the gaming machine Ke 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Further, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means every time a predetermined timing arrives, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the predetermined process is executed by the process execution means. Will be done. As a result, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it can be detected at an early stage and some measures can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine Ke 1
The gaming machine 2 is characterized in that the predetermined timing is the elapse of a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means every time a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that it can be reliably found.

In the game machine Ke 1
The gaming machine 3 is characterized in that the predetermined timing is the start of the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the start condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine Ke 3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Ke 1, the following effects are played. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means at each start of the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that it can be reliably found before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3.
The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the notification that the probability level is abnormal is performed, so that there is an effect that the player or the hall side can immediately grasp the state.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 4,
The gaming machine 5. The predetermined processing includes a processing for stopping the game.

According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game is stopped when the probability level is confirmed to be abnormal, there is an effect that the player can suppress suffering a disadvantage by playing at the abnormal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 5.
The gaming machine 6 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for changing the level of probability by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine Ke 6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines 1 to 5, the following effects are played. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that there is an effect that the game can be returned to the game at the normal probability level.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
In the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, a confirmation means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal, and a confirmation means.
1. A gaming machine that includes a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the gaming machine Ko 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability of achieving a given result is changed among multiple levels by the changing means. Then, in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a predetermined process is performed. Is executed by the processing execution means. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the probability level is destroyed, it can be reliably found and some measures can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine Ko 1
The gaming machine co2 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

According to the gaming machine Ko 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Ko 1, the following effects are played. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the notification that the probability level is abnormal is performed, so that there is an effect that the player or the hall side can immediately grasp the state.

In the gaming machine Ko 1 or Ko 2.
The gaming machine co3 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process of infinitely looping.

According to the gaming machine Ko 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Ko 1 or Ko 2, the following effects are played. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, an infinite loop is performed, so that there is an effect that the start-up process is completed and the game is suppressed while the probability level remains abnormal.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3,
The gaming machine co4 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for changing the level of probability by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine Ko 4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Ko 1 to Ko 3, the following effects are played. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that there is an effect that the start-up process can be completed at the normal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3,
The gaming machine co4 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for setting the level of the probability to one of the normal levels.

According to the gaming machine Ko 5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Ko 1 to Ko 3, the following effects are played. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so that the start-up process can be completed at the normal probability level. be.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
It is provided with a start-up means for executing a process by the change process execution means, provided that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.
In the case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the start-up means is described even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A gaming machine service machine 1, characterized in that processing by a change processing execution means is executed.

According to the gaming machine service machine 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. The process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. If the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the change processing is executed by the start-up means even if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied when the power is turned on. Processing by means is executed. As a result, if the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level can be changed without fail when the power is turned on after that, so the probability level can be changed with confidence. You can make changes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine servicer 1
In the case where the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the start-up means is described even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. The gaming machine servicer 2 is characterized in that the processing by the change processing execution means is executed from the beginning.

According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1. That is, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the change processing is executed by the start-up means even if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied when the power is turned on. Processing by means is executed from the beginning. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, which has the effect of being able to change the probability level with peace of mind.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
A confirmation process execution means for executing a process that enables confirmation of the set probability level, and
On condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process by the change processing executing means is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is executed. It is provided with a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied.
When the start-up means is executing the process by the change processing execution means when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the processing by the change processing execution means is executed.

According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is provided on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is predetermined when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Then, when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the standing state is established. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the raising means. As a result, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level is always changed even if the power is turned on by satisfying the second predetermined condition. Because you can change the probability level with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine 1
When the start-up means is executing the process by the change processing execution means when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the gaming machine servicer 2 is characterized in that the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1. That is, when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, it stands. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed from the beginning by the raising means. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, which has the effect of being able to change the probability level with peace of mind.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
When the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means, the first storage means for storing the original probability level and the first storage means.
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a second storage means for storing a probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means.

According to the gaming machine S1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. When the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means is stored in the second storage means. To. As a result, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level is changed by using the second storage means. Therefore, when the processing is stopped during the execution of the processing by the change processing execution means, the first 1 The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with peace of mind, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine Su 1
The first storage means is characterized in that the original probability level is continuously stored even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1. That is, since the original probability level stored in the first storage means is maintained even when the power is turned off, the power is supplied even when the power is turned off during the execution of the process by the change processing executing means. The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the first storage means after the input. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with peace of mind, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
It is provided with a start-up means for executing a process by the change process execution means, provided that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.
When the power is turned on, the start-up means has a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Even if is satisfied, the process by the change process execution means is executed.
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to the first state.
The second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to a second state different from the first state.
The change processing execution means includes a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means provides the first operation means of the first operation means. The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that when a change from a state to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined.

According to the gaming machine S1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. The process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, it is the case that the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means. As a result, if the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level is reached even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on thereafter. Since you can change the probability level, you can change the probability level with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. Further, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to the second state different from the first state. I'm out. Then, the change processing execution means has a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means provides the first state of the first operation means. When the change from to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined. Here, even if the change processing execution means is executed by satisfying the second predetermined condition, the change processing execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state and is changed. Rather than determining the level, the detection means determines the changed probability level triggered by the detection of a change from the first state to the second state of the first operating means. Therefore, even if the change processing execution means is executed by satisfying the second predetermined condition, there is an effect that the probability level can be surely changed.

In the game machine S1
The gaming machine second, wherein the first operating means is a key.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the first operating means is a key, so that the probability level can be easily obtained by simply shifting the key from the first state to the second state. Has the effect of being able to determine.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
It is provided with a start-up means for executing a process by the change process execution means, provided that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.
When the power is turned on, the start-up means has a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. If it is established, the gaming machine So 1 is characterized in that it is in an infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine So 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. The process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, when the process by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, and the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Is in an infinite loop state. As a result, the probability level can be changed with peace of mind by encouraging the power to be turned on by satisfying a predetermined condition and executing the process by the change process execution means in the start-up process. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine So 1
The gaming machine So2 is characterized in that the start-up means is provided with a notification means for instructing the power to be turned on by satisfying the predetermined condition in the case of the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine So2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine So1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an infinite loop state is set by the start-up means, the notification means is used to give an instruction to satisfy a predetermined condition and turn on the power. This has the effect that it is possible to easily understand that the power should be turned on by satisfying a predetermined condition.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
A confirmation process execution means for executing a process that enables confirmation of the set probability level, and
On condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process by the change processing executing means is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is executed. It is provided with a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied.
The start-up means is
When the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition is satisfied even when the power is turned on. Execute the process by the change process execution means,
When the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. When the condition is satisfied, the gaming machine Ta 1 is in an infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine Ta 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is provided on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is predetermined when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Then, when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the standing state is established. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the raising means. As a result, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level is always changed even if the power is turned on by satisfying the second predetermined condition. Because you can change the probability level with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. In addition, when the process by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. If is satisfied, it is in an infinite loop state. As a result, the probability level can be changed with peace of mind by encouraging the power to be turned on by satisfying a predetermined condition and executing the process by the change process execution means in the start-up process. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine Ta 1
The start-up means is characterized by comprising a notification means for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition in the case of the infinite loop state. Game machine to play 2.

According to the gaming machine Ta 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Ta 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an infinite loop state is set by the start-up means, the notification means is used to give an instruction to turn on the power by satisfying a predetermined condition or a second predetermined condition. This has the effect that it is possible to easily understand that the power should be turned on by satisfying a predetermined condition or a second predetermined condition.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
It is provided with a start-up means for executing a process by the change process execution means, provided that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to the first state.
The change processing executing means includes a detecting means for detecting that the first operating means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the first operating means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the change of is detected, the probability level is changed.
The gaming machine is
A storage means for storing the state of the first operation means of the previous time is provided.
The detecting means refers to the state of the first operating means stored in the storage means last time and the state of the first operating means at that time, and the first operating means is in the second state to the first state. It detects whether or not it has been changed to
The storage means is characterized in that the first state is stored as the state of the previous first operation means between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the detection by the detection means is performed for the first time. ..

According to the gaming machine Chi 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. The process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to the first state. Then, the change processing execution means has a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the second state to the first state, and the detection means provides the second state of the first operation means. When the change from to the first state is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the state of the previous first operating means is stored in the storage means, and the detecting means refers to the state of the previous first operating means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operating means at that time. Then, it is detected whether or not the first operating means has been changed from the second state to the first state. Then, the storage means stores the first state as the state of the previous first operating means between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the detection means performs detection for the first time. As a result, when the power is turned on, the first operating means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition, and the first operating means is continued in the first state until the detection by the detecting means is performed for the first time. Even so, since the first state is stored in the storage means as the state of the first operation means last time between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the detection means first detects the power, it is the first time. In the detection of the detection means to be performed, it is possible to suppress the detection that the first operating means has been changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operating means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the probability level from being erroneously changed based on the first operating means, so that the probability can be changed suitably. It has the effect of being able to provide a machine.

In the game machine Chi 1
The storage means can store information used for controlling a game and can hold the information even when the power is turned off.
2. The gaming machine Chi 2 is characterized in that the first operating means is instructed to erase information stored in the storage means when the first state is set.

According to the gaming machine Chi 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Chi 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means can store the information used for controlling the game and can hold the information even when the power is turned off, and the first operating means stores the information in the storage means when the first state is set. It is instructed to erase the information that has been sent. As a result, the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, the storage means can be changed without providing a dedicated operation means for changing the probability level. There is an effect that the probability level can also be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
A start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means and a start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.
It is equipped with a storage means that stores information used for controlling the game and can retain the information even when the power is turned off.
If it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, the start-up means is set to an infinite loop state.
The gaming machine is
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a means for executing a process of monitoring a power failure even in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine Tsu 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. The process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is turned off. Here, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal in the start-up means, an infinite loop state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played at an abnormal probability level because the probability level changed before the power was turned off was not held correctly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, even in the infinite loop state, the process of monitoring the power failure is executed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from becoming abnormal any more by correctly performing the process related to the power cutoff.

In game machine Tsu 1
2. The gaming machine 2 is provided with a means for executing a random number update process used for the predetermined determination even in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine Tsu 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Tsu 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even in the infinite loop state, the random number update process used for the predetermined determination is executed. This has the effect that the random number update process can be continued as long as the power is continuously turned on.

In the gaming machine Tsu 1 or Tsu 2.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the start-up means is provided with a notification means for instructing the power to be turned on by satisfying the predetermined condition in the case of the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine Tsu 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Tsu 1 or Tsu 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an infinite loop state is set by the start-up means, the notification means is used to give an instruction to satisfy a predetermined condition and turn on the power. This has the effect that the power can be turned on by satisfying a predetermined condition.

A game area with multiple winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
It is provided with a start-up means for executing a process by the change process execution means, provided that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.
The start-up means is characterized in that, when it is determined that the player is in a predetermined state, a process for non-execution of the control related to the game is performed, and a means for notifying the external device to that effect is provided. Gaming machine Te 1.

According to the gaming machine Te 1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. The process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, when it is determined that the start-up means is in a predetermined state, a process for non-execution of the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified to that effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being played at an abnormal probability level due to the fact that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, since the external device is notified to that effect, there is an effect that the person concerned in the hall or the like can take some measures against it.

In the game machine Te 1
The predetermined state is a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the process by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. The gaming machine Te 2 characterized in that it is in a established state.

According to the gaming machine Te 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Te 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the process by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, and the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Is processed to non-execute the control related to the game, and the external device is notified to that effect. As a result, when the process by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Has the effect that a predetermined condition can be satisfied and the power can be turned on.

In the gaming machine Te 1 or Te 2.
It is equipped with a storage means that stores information used for controlling the game and can retain the information even when the power is turned off.
The gaming machine Te3 is characterized in that the predetermined state is a state in which the information stored in the storage means is abnormal.

According to the gaming machine Te 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Te 1 or Te 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, a process for non-execution of the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified to that effect. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, some measures are taken against it. It has the effect of being able to be directed to.

A game area with a number of winning openings,
A launching means for launching a game medium into the game area,
A winning detection means provided for each winning opening and detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening,
When it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning openings of the game medium. Equipped with a payout means to pay out the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result.
A change processing execution means for executing a process of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels, and a change process execution means.
A confirmation process execution means for executing a process that enables confirmation of the set probability level, and
On condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process by the change processing executing means is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is executed. On the condition that the condition is satisfied, the start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means and the start-up means.
An interrupt processing means that performs processing to monitor at least whether or not the power is turned off based on interrupts generated at predetermined time intervals.
The gaming machine 1 is provided with an interrupt permission means for permitting an interrupt while the process by the change process execution means is executed and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is executed. ..

According to the gaming machine G1, the gaming medium is launched by the launching means into the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won a prize in any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media are used for the winning opening of the gaming medium. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the process executed by the change process execution means, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is provided on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is predetermined when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Further, a process of monitoring at least whether or not the power is turned off is performed by the interrupt processing means based on the interrupts generated at predetermined time intervals. Then, the interrupt is permitted by the interrupt permission means while the process by the change process execution means is executed and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is executed. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power is turned off while the process by the change processing execution means is executed and while the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is executed, and when the power is turned off, the power is turned off. Such processing can be executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the process corresponding to the situation where the power is turned off is executed while the process by the change process execution means is executed or the process by the confirmation process execution means is executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine To 1
2. The gaming machine is provided with an interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting an interrupt when the processing by the change processing executing means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing executing means ends.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G1. That is, when the processing by the change processing execution means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing execution means ends, the interrupt prohibition means prohibits the interrupt. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the start-up means from unnecessarily executing the interrupt process by the interrupt processing means.

A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, B 1 to B 7, C 1 to C 5, D 1 to D 3, O 1, O 2, Ka 1, Ka 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, and To 2. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and an operation means for starting (for example, an operation lever) can be operated. Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, B 1 to B 7, C 1 to C 5, D 1 to D 3, O 1, O 2, Ka 1, Ka 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 A gaming machine Y2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, and To 2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, B 1 to B 7, C 1 to C 5, D 1 to D 3, O 1, O 2, Ka 1, Ka 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, and To 2. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

The "ball" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "game medium" in the claims, and the "feature ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "payment means" in the claims. The "continuous bonus ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of the game media". It corresponds to "the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the prize to the second winning opening to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means" in the claims.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
63a 1st ordinary winning opening (winning opening)
63b 2nd ordinary winning opening (winning opening)
64a 1st start opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening)
64b 2nd start opening (winning opening, 1st winning opening)
65a Large prize opening (winning opening, first winning opening, second winning opening)
100 Board box 110 Main control device (main control means, display control means)
111 Payout control device (payout means)
112a Ball launch unit (launching means)
122 RAM erase switch (predetermined operating means, information erasing instruction means, first operating means)
200 register 201 MPU (calculation means)
202e Prize ball number table (payout information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203 RAM (storage means)
203l Real-time base value data (part of game performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203m Previous base value data (part of game performance information storage means, first storage area)
203n Base value data two times before (part of game performance information storage means, second storage area)
203o Base value data two times before (part of game performance information storage means)
203p New start-up flag (new start-up identification means)
203x Area in used area (first storage means)
203x1 outside work area (first work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203x11 Probability set value data (first storage means)
203x12 update probability set value data (second storage means)
203x16 RAM erase switch flag (storage means)
203y Area outside the used area (second storage means)
203y1 Outside work area (work area, second work area)
203y2 outer stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r base value data (storage means)
203s Data for accessory ratio (storage means)
203t Error data (error history storage means)
207 Accessory ratio management chip (microchip)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connection means)
208a First start port switch (winning detection means)
208b 2nd start port switch (winning detection means)
208c 1st ordinary winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d 2nd ordinary winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Grand prize opening switch (winning detection means)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 1st reading memory (2nd storage means)
264 Second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 Capacitor (power supply means)
300 Inspection device (external device)
401 Base display device (game performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7-segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7-segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 setting key (permission means, first operation means)
502 Error display button (Error history display reception means)
S152 (Means for setting the number of payouts)
S717 (Power failure detection means)
S728 (second memory control means)
S729 (Judgment means)
S740, S741 (memory control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third memory control means)
S761 (memory control means)
S751 to S7544, S771, S772 (output means)
S2022 (evacuation means)
S2024 (Stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (return means)
S2031 (first fixed value storage means)
S2041 (second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (confirmation display means)
S3008 (stopping means)
S3208 (game performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (Special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode start-up means)
S4004: No (third mode start-up means)
S4011: Yes (second mode start-up means)
S4011: No (4th mode start-up means)
S4005 (Change means)
S4210 (confirmation processing execution means)
S4213 (Change processing execution means)
S4301 (Interrupt permission means)
S4308 (Detecting means)
S4309 (Detection means)
S4312 (Interruption prohibition means)
S4401 (Interrupt permission means)
S4405 (Interruption prohibition means)

Claims (1)

The means of launch and
The flow area where the game ball launched by the launching means flows down, and
A plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area of the flow area, and
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executes a process for imparting a game value to the game.
The payout means for paying out the game ball as the game value,
A process execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and does not transmit or receive a control signal to or from the payout means, and a process execution means that executes a predetermined process.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means that stores reference information that is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of electric power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of the specific process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
Equipped with
The processing execution means is
A second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value adding means, and a second reference information storage means.
An execution means that executes the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means.
A processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information on the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means, and a processing result information storage means.
A display control means for controlling a predetermined display means based on the processing result information is provided.
The game value-adding means and the processing execution means are configured by using integrated circuits integrated in different semiconductor chips, and are housed in different board boxes.
When the power is turned off, the second reference information storage means may lose the stored reference information.
The gaming machine is
A main control means that is provided with the game value-adding means and that mainly controls the game,
A sub-control means that executes processing based on an instruction from the main control means is provided.
The processing execution means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided in the sub-control means.

Images